Sharp NoteVision PG-MB60X Operation Manual

Page 1
MULTIMEDIA PROJECTOR
MODEL
PG-MB60X
OPERATION MANUAL
Introduction
Quick Start
Setup
Basic Operation
Useful Features
Appendix
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 2
IMPORTANT
For your assistance in reporting the loss or theft of your Projector, please record the Serial Number located on the bottom of the projector and retain this information. Before recycling the packaging, please ensure that you have checked the contents of the carton thoroughly against the list of “Supplied accessories” on page
10.
Model No.: PG-MB60X
Serial No.:
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 3
SPECIAL NOTE FOR USERS IN THE U.K.
The mains lead of this product is fitted with a non-rewireable (moulded) plug incorporating a 5A fuse. Should the fuse need to be replaced, a BSI or ASTA approved BS 1362 fuse marked
or and of the same rating as above, which is also indicated on the pin face of the plug, must be used. Always refit the fuse cover after replacing the fuse. Never use the plug without the fuse cover fitted. In the unlikely event of the socket outlet in your home not being compatible with the plug supplied, cut off the mains plug and fit an appropriate type.
DANGER:
The fuse from the cut-off plug should be removed and the cut-off plug destroyed immediately and disposed of in a safe manner. Under no circumstances should the cut-off plug be inserted elsewhere into a 5A socket outlet, as a serious electric shock may occur. To fit an appropriate plug to the mains lead, follow the instructions below:
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT:
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Green-and-yellow : Earth Blue : Neutral
Brown : Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured green-and-yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by
the letter E or by the safety earth symbol
or coloured green or green-and-yellow.
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured
red.
IF YOU HAVE ANY DOUBT, CONSULT A QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 4
The supplied CD-ROM contains operation instructions in English, German, French, Swedish, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Chinese (Traditional Chinese and Simplified Chinese) and Korean. Carefully read through the operation instructions before operating the projector.
Die mitgelieferte CD-ROM enthält Bedienungsanleitungen in Englisch, Deutsch, Französisch, Schwedisch, Spanisch, Italienisch, Niederländisch, Portugiesisch, Chinesisch (Traditionelles Chinesisch und einfaches Chinesisch) und Koreanisch. Bitte lesen Sie die Bedienungsanleitung vor der Verwendung des Projektors sorgfältig durch.
Le CD-ROM fourni contient les instructions de fonctionnement en anglais, allemand, français, suédois, espagnol, italien, néerlandais, portugais, chinois (chinois traditionnel et chinois simplifié) et coréen. Veuillez lire attentivement ces instructions avant de faire fonctionner le projecteur.
Den medföljande CD-ROM-skivan innehåller bruksanvisningar på engelska, tyska, franska, svenska, spanska, italienska, holländska, portugisiska, kinesiska (traditionell kinesiska och förenklad kinesiska) och koreanska. Läs noga igenom bruksanvisningen innan projektorn tas i bruk.
El CD-ROM suministrado contiene instrucciones de operación en inglés, alemán, francés, sueco, español, italiano, holandés, portugués, chino (chino tradicional y chino simplificado) y coreano. Lea cuidadosamente las instrucciones de operación antes de utilizar el proyector.
Il CD-ROM in dotazione contiene istruzioni per l’uso in inglese, tedesco, francese, svedese, spagnolo, italiano, olandese, portoghese, cinese (cinese tradizionale e cinese semplificato) e coreano. Leggere attentamente le istruzioni per l’uso prima di usare il proiettore.
De meegeleverde CD-ROM bevat handleidingen in het Engels, Duits, Frans, Zweeds, Spaans, Italiaans, Nederlands, Portugees, Chinees (Traditioneel Chinees en Vereenvoudigd Chinees) en Koreaans. Lees de handleiding zorgvuldig door voor u de projector in gebruik neemt.
O CD-ROM fornecido contém instruções de operação em Inglês, Alemão, Francês, Sueco, Espanhol, Italiano, Holandês, Português, Chinês, (Chinês Tradicional e Chinês Simplificado) e Coreano. Leia cuidadosamente todas as instruções de operação antes de operar o projetor.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 5
-1
Introduction
Before using the projector, please read this operation manual carefully.
There are two important reasons for prompt warranty registration of your new SHARP Projector, using the REGISTRATION CARD packed with the projector.
1. WARRANTY
This is to assure that you immediately receive the full benefit of the parts, service and labor warranty applicable to your purchase.
2. CONSUMER PRODUCT SAFETY ACT
To ensure that you will promptly receive any safety notification of inspection, modification, or recall that SHARP may be required to give under the 1972 Consumer Product Safety Act, PLEASE READ CAREFULLY THE IMPORTANT “LIMITED WARRANTY” CLAUSE.
WARNING: High brightness light source. Do not stare into the beam of light, or view directly. Be especially
careful that children do not stare directly into the beam of light.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this product to
rain or moisture.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equip­ment.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS EXCEPT LAMP UNIT.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk or electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within a triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
Introduction
ENGLISH
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE SCREWS
EXCEPT SPECIFIED USER
SERVICE SCREW.
INFORMATION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the operation manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
See bottom of projector.
The enclosed computer cable must be used with the device. The cable is provided to ensure that the device complies with FCC Class A verification.
U.S.A. ONLY
U.S.A. ONLY
U.S.A. ONLY
U.S.A. ONLY
WARNING:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Appendix
Maintenance ................................................. 61
Maintenance Indicators ............................... 62
Regarding the Lamp .................................... 64
Lamp .................................................................64
Caution Concerning the Lamp .......................... 64
Replacing the Lamp .......................................... 64
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit ............ 65
Resetting the Lamp Timer ................................. 66
Computer Compatibility Chart .................... 67
Troubleshooting ........................................... 68
For SHARP Assistance ................................ 70
Specifications ............................................... 71
Glossary ........................................................ 72
Index .............................................................. 73
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Caution concerning the lamp unit
64
Caution concerning the setup of the pro- jector
Do not set up the projector in places ex- posed to direct sunlight or bright light.
The projector may be safely tilted to a maximum angle of 12 degrees.
Warning about placing the projector in a high position
Do not subject the projector to hard im- pact and/or vibration.
Rest your eyes occasionally.
Avoid locations with extremes of tem- perature.
Do not block the intake and exhaust vents.
62 63
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 6
-2
WARNING:
The cooling fan in this projector continues to run for about 90 seconds after the projector enters the standby mode. During normal operation, when putting the projector into standby mode always use the STANDBY button on the projector or on the remote control. Ensure the cooling fan has stopped before disconnecting the power cord. DURING NORMAL OPERATION, NEVER TURN THE PROJECTOR OFF BY DISCONNECTING THE POWER CORD. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS WILL RESULT IN PREMATURE LAMP FAILURE.
Caution Concerning Lamp Replacement
See “Replacing the Lamp” on page 64.
PRODUCT DISPOSAL
This projector utilizes tin-lead solder, and a pressurized lamp containing a small amount of mercury. Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or, if you are located in the United States of America, the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org .
LAMP REPLACEMENT WARNING :
TURN OFF THE LAMP AND DISCONNECT POWER CORD BEFORE OPENING THIS COVER. HOT SURFACE INSIDE. ALLOW 1 HOUR TO COOL BEFORE REPLACING THE LAMP. REPLACE WITH SAME SHARP LAMP UNIT MODEL AN-MB60LP ONLY.
HIGH PRESSURE LAMP :
RISK OF EXPLOSION. POTENTIAL HAZARD OF GLASS PARTICLES IF LAMP HAS RUPTURED. HANDLE WITH CARE. SEE OPERATION MANUAL.
SERVICEMAN-WARNING :
USE RADIATION EYE AND
SKIN PROTECTION DURING SERVICING.
AVERTISSEMENT CONCERNANT LE REMPLACEMENT DE LA LAMPE :
ETEINDRE LA LAMPE ET DEBRANCHER LE CORDON D’ALIMENTATION AVANT D’OUVRIR LE COUVERCLE. L’INTERIEUR DU BOITIER ETANT EXTREMEMENT CHAUD, ATTENDRE 1 HEURE AVANT DE PROCEDER AU REMPLACEMENT DE LA LAMPE. NE REMPLACER QUE PAR UNE LAMPE SHARP DE MODÈLE AN-MB60LP.
LAMPE A HAUTE PRESSION :
RISQUE D’EXPLOSION. DANGER POTENTIEL DE PARTICULES DE VERRE EN CAS D’ECLATEMENT DE LA LAMPE. A MANIPULER AVEC PRECAUTION. SE REPORTER AU MODE D’EMPLOI.
AVERTISSEMENT – REPARATEUR :
SE PROTEGER LES
YEUX ET LA PEAU DES RADIATIONS LORS DES REPARATIONS.
This SHARP projector uses a DMD panel. This very sophisticated panel contains 786,432 pixels micromirrors. As with any high technology electronic equipment such as large screen TVs, video systems and video cameras, there are certain acceptable tolerances that the equipment must conform to. This unit has some inactive pixels within acceptable tolerances which may result in inactive dots on the picture screen. This will not affect the picture quality or the life expectancy of the unit.
DLPTM (Digital Light Processing) and DMDTM (Digital Micromirror Device) are trademarks of Texas Instru- ments, Inc.
Microsoft
®
and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
PC/AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States.
Adobe
®
Reader® is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Macintosh
®
is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
All other company or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective compa­nies.
Some IC chips in this product include confidential and/or trade secret property belonging to Texas Instru­ments. Therefore you may not copy, modify, adapt, translate, distribute, reverse engineer, reverse as­semble or discompile the contents thereof.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 7
-3
Introduction
-40
The menu can be operated to achieve two functions, adjustments and settings. (For setting the menu items, see pages 42 and 43. )
Using the Menu Screen
Menu Selections (Adjustments)
Example: Adjusting “Bright”
This operation can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Menu icons
ENTER button
MENU button
UNDO button
MOUSE/ Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Adjustment buttons ('/"/\/|)
MENU button
ENTER button
Example: “Picture” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press .
The “Picture” menu screen for the se­lected input mode is displayed.
2
Press
||
||
| or
\\
\\
\ to display the other
menu screens.
The menu icon for the selected menu screen is highlighted.
Note
The “Fine Sync” menu is not available for selecting INPUT 3 or INPUT 4.
Menu icon Menu screen
Picture
Fine Sync
Options1
Options2
Language
How to Read this Operation Manual
••
••
In this operation manual, the illustrations and on-screen displays are simplified for explana-
tion. This may differ from the actual on-screen display.
Info
............Indicates safeguards when using the projector.
For Future Reference
Maintenance Troubleshooting Index
Page 73
Pages 68 and 69
Page 61
On-screen display
Button used in this step
Note
........Indicates additional information for setting up and operating the projector.
Buttons used in this operation
Buttons used in this operation
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 8
-4
Contents
Preparing
Setting up the Projector .............................. 19
Setting up the Projector ..................................... 19
Projecting a Reversed Image ............................ 20
Connections
Connections ................................................. 21
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable
Main Equipment .......................................... 21
Samples of Cables for Connection ............. 22
Connecting to a Computer .......................... 23
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless
Computer Mouse ........................................ 24
Connecting to Video Equipment ................. 25
Controlling the Projector by a Computer ... 27 Connecting to a Monitor with RGB
Input Terminal ......................................... 28
Connecting to an Amplifier or Other
Audio Equipment .................................... 28
Introduction
How to Read this Operation Manual ............. 3
Contents.......................................................... 4
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .......................... 6
How to Access the PDF Operation Manuals
... 9
Accessories .................................................. 10
Part Names and Functions .......................... 11
Using the Remote Control ........................... 15
Usable Range .................................................... 15
Inserting the Batteries ....................................... 15
Quick Start
Quick Start .................................................... 16
Setup
Storing the Projector ................................... 18
How to Use the Storage Case ........................... 18
Using
Basic Operation
Turning the Projector On/Off ....................... 29
Image Projection .......................................... 30
Using the Adjustment Feet ................................ 30
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion ...................... 31
Adjusting the Focus ........................................... 32
Adjusting the Projected Image Size .................. 32
Switching the INPUT Mode ............................... 33
Adjusting the Volume......................................... 33
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning
off the Sound Temporarily ........................... 34
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
....... 34
Freezing a Moving Image .................................. 35
Selecting the Picture Mode ............................... 35
Resize Mode ...................................................... 36
Useful Features
Menu Items ................................................... 38
Using the Menu Screen ............................... 40
Menu Selections (Adjustments) ......................... 40
Menu Selections (Settings) ................................ 42
Picture Adjustment (“Picture” menu)......... 44
Selecting the Picture Mode ............................... 44
Adjusting the Image .......................................... 44
Emphasizing the Contrast ................................. 45
Adjusting the Color Temperature ....................... 45
sRGB Setting ..................................................... 46
Signal Type Setting ............................................ 46
Computer Image Adjustment
(“Fine Sync” menu) ................................ 47
Adjusting the Computer Image ......................... 47
Special Modes Setting ...................................... 47
Auto Sync Adjustment ....................................... 48
Checking the Input Signal ................................. 48
Using the “Options1” Menu ......................... 49
Checking the Lamp Life Status ......................... 49
Setting the Resize Mode ................................... 49
Setting On-screen Display................................. 50
Setting the Video System................................... 50
Selecting a Startup and Background Image
....... 51
Eco Mode .......................................................... 51
Auto Power Off Function .................................... 52
Selecting the Menu Screen Position .................. 52
System Lock Function ....................................... 53
Keylock Function ............................................... 54
Helpful Functions Set during Installation
(“Options2” menu) .................................. 55
Setting a Password ............................................ 55
If You Forget Your Password ..............................55
Auto Keystone Setting ....................................... 56
Speaker Setting ................................................. 56
Setting the Audio Output Type .......................... 57
Reversing/Inverting Projected Images .............. 57
Selecting the Transmission Speed (RS-232C)
....... 58
Monitor Output Settings ..................................... 58
Returning to the Default Settings ....................... 59
Using the “Language” Menu ....................... 60
Selecting the On-screen Display Language ....... 60
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 9
-1
Introduction
Before using the projector, please read this operation manual carefully.
There are two important reasons for prompt warranty registration of your new SHARP Projector, using the REGISTRATION CARD packed with the projector.
1. WARRANTY
This is to assure that you immediately receive the full benefit of the parts, service and labor warranty applicable to your purchase.
2. CONSUMER PRODUCT SAFETY ACT
To ensure that you will promptly receive any safety notification of inspection, modification, or recall that SHARP may be required to give under the 1972 Consumer Product Safety Act, PLEASE READ CAREFULLY THE IMPORTANT “LIMITED WARRANTY” CLAUSE.
WARNING: High brightness light source. Do not stare into the beam of light, or view directly. Be especially
careful that children do not stare directly into the beam of light.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this product to
rain or moisture.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equip­ment.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS EXCEPT LAMP UNIT.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk or electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within a triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
Introduction
ENGLISH
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE SCREWS
EXCEPT SPECIFIED USER
SERVICE SCREW.
INFORMATION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the operation manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
See bottom of projector.
The enclosed computer cable must be used with the device. The cable is provided to ensure that the device complies with FCC Class A verification.
U.S.A. ONLY
U.S.A. ONLY
U.S.A. ONLY
U.S.A. ONLY
WARNING:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Reference
Appendix
Maintenance ................................................. 61
Maintenance Indicators ............................... 62
Regarding the Lamp .................................... 64
Lamp ................................................................. 64
Caution Concerning the Lamp .......................... 64
Replacing the Lamp .......................................... 64
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit ............ 65
Resetting the Lamp Timer ................................. 66
Computer Compatibility Chart .................... 67
Troubleshooting ........................................... 68
For SHARP Assistance ................................ 70
Specifications ............................................... 71
Glossary ........................................................ 72
Index .............................................................. 73
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Ensure that you read the following safeguards when setting up your projector.
Caution concerning the lamp unit
64
Caution concerning the setup of the pro- jector
Do not set up the projector in places ex- posed to direct sunlight or bright light.
The projector may be safely tilted to a maximum angle of 12 degrees.
Warning about placing the projector in a high position
Do not subject the projector to hard im- pact and/or vibration.
Rest your eyes occasionally.
Avoid locations with extremes of tem- perature.
Do not block the intake and exhaust vents.
62 63
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 10
-6
1. Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated.
2. Retain Instructions
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
3. Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
4. Follow Instructions
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
5. Cleaning
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
6. Attachments
Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7. Water and Moisture
Do not use this product near water–for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like.
8. Accessories
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturers instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9. Transportation
A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn.
10. Ventilation
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturers instructions have been adhered to.
11. Power Sources
This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12. Grounding or Polarization
This product is provided with one of the following types of plugs. If the plug should fail to fit into the power outlet, please contact your electrician. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
a. Two-wire type (mains) plug. b. Three-wire grounding type (mains) plug with a
grounding terminal. This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product.
14. Lightning
For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.
15. Overloading
Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
17. Servicing
Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
18. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged. b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into
the product. c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water. d. If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions, as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to normal
operation. e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way. f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance, this indicates a need for service.
19. Replacement Parts
When replacement parts are required, ensure that the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.
20. Safety Check
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition.
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
This product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
22. Heat
This product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This product has been engineered and manufactured to assure your personal safety. BUT IMPROPER USE CAN RESULT IN POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARDS. In order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated in this product, observe the following basic rules for its installation, use and servicing.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
11
Other connected equipment
Using the projector in other countries
Temperature monitor function
62
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label (supplied) on the projector will help you check the setup procedure. Ensure to attach the “QUICK GUIDE” Label on the top cabinet of the projector as shown in the drawing on the right. Do not attach the “QUICK GUIDE” label anywhere else to avoid blocking an air intake or exhaust vent.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Info
Info
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
23
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
When left-clicking
When right-clicking
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
56
31
Info
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Press on the remote control.
36 37
49
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Info
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
31
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
4 Press .
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
63
About the lamp indicator
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Caution
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Info
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
1 Connect the power cord.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
France Sharp Electronics France
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Auto Sync
Background
Border
Clock
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Dot by dot
Intelligent compression
Keylock
Keystone Correction
Password
Phase
Picture Mode
Resize
sRGB
Stretch
System Lock
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 11
-1
Introduction
Before using the projector, please read this operation manual carefully.
1. WARRANTY
2. CONSUMER PRODUCT SAFETY ACT
WARNING:
WARNING:
WARNING:
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS EXCEPT LAMP UNIT.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
Introduction
ENGLISH
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE SCREWS
EXCEPT SPECIFIED USER
SERVICE SCREW.
INFORMATION
WARNING:
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Reference
Appendix
Maintenance ................................................. 61
Maintenance Indicators ............................... 62
Regarding the Lamp .................................... 64
Computer Compatibility Chart .................... 67
Troubleshooting ........................................... 68
For SHARP Assistance ................................ 70
Specifications ............................................... 71
Glossary ........................................................ 72
Index .............................................................. 73
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Ensure that you read the following safeguards when setting up your projector.
Caution concerning the lamp unit
Potential hazard of glass particles if lamp ruptures. In case of lamp rupture, contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projec- tor Dealer or Service Center for a replacement. See “Replacing the Lamp” on page 64.
Caution concerning the setup of the pro- jector
For minimal servicing and to maintain high image quality, SHARP recommends that this projector be installed in an area free from hu- midity, dust and cigarette smoke. When the projector is subjected to these environments, the vents and lens must be cleaned more often. As long as the projector is regularly cleaned, use in these environments will not reduce the overall operation life of the unit. Internal cleaning should only be performed by a Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
Do not set up the projector in places ex- posed to direct sunlight or bright light.
Position the screen so that it is not in direct sunlight or room light. Light falling directly on the screen washes out the colors, making viewing difficult. Close the curtains and dim the lights when setting up the screen in a sunny or bright room.
The projector may be safely tilted to a maximum angle of 12 degrees.
Placement should be within ±12 degrees of horizontal.
Warning about placing the projector in a high position
When placing the projector in a high posi- tion, ensure to secure it carefully to avoid per- sonal injury caused by the projector falling down.
Do not subject the projector to hard im- pact and/or vibration.
Take care with the lens so as not to hit or damage the surface of the lens.
Rest your eyes occasionally.
Continuously watching the screen for long hours will cause eye strain. Ensure to occa- sionally rest your eyes.
Avoid locations with extremes of tem- perature.
The operating temperature of the projector is from 41°F to 104°F (+5°C to +40°C).
The storage temperature of the projector is from –4°F to 140°F (–20°C to +60°C).
Do not block the intake and exhaust vents.
Allow at least 7 7/8 inches (20 cm) of space between the exhaust vent and the nearest wall or obstruction.
Ensure that the intake vent and the exhaust vent are not obstructed.
If the cooling fan becomes obstructed, a pro- tection circuit will automatically put the pro- jector into standby mode to prevent overheat damage. This does not indicate a malfunc- tion (See pages 62 and 63.). Remove the pro- jector power cord from the wall outlet and wait at least 10 minutes. Place the projector where the intake and exhaust vents are not blocked, plug the power cord back in and turn on the projector. This will return the projector to the normal operating condition.
PRECAUCION PRECAUTION
CAUTION
AN-MB60LP
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 12
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it.
Do not use the projector by holding the lens.
When storing the projector, ensure to attach
the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.)
Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected.
Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector.
If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and
the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49.
Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking.
When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally.
Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn
or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool
before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you
may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 13
-9
Introduction
PDF operation manuals in several languages are included in the CD-ROM, so that you can work with the projector. To utilize these manuals, you need to install Adobe® Reader® on your computer (Windows® or Macintosh®).
Please download Adobe® Reader® from the Internet (http://www.adobe.com).
Accessing the PDF Manuals
For Windows®:
1 Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. 2 Double click the “My Computer” icon. 3 Double click the “CD-ROM” drive. 4
When you want to view the operation manual
1) Double click the “MANUALS” folder.
2) Double click the language (name of the folder) that you want to view.
3) Double click the “MB60” pdf file to access the projector manuals.
When you want to view the setup guide
1) Double click the “SETUP” folder.
2) Double click the language (name of the folder) that you want to view.
3) Double click the “SE_MB6” pdf file to access the setup guide.
For Macintosh
®
:
1 Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. 2 Double click the “CD-ROM” icon. 3
When you want to view the operation manual
1) Double click the “MANUALS” folder.
2) Double click the language (name of the folder) that you want to view.
3) Double click the “MB60” pdf file to access the projector manuals.
When you want to view the setup guide
1) Double click the “SETUP” folder.
2) Double click the language (name of the folder) that you want to view.
3) Double click the “SE_MB6” pdf file to access the setup guide.
How to Access the PDF Operation Manuals
Info
If the desired pdf file cannot be opened by double clicking the mouse, start Adobe® Reader® first, then specify the desired file using the “File”, “Open” menu.
SETUP GUIDE
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
Screen Size and Projection Distance ........... 2
Connecting Pin Assignments ....................... 3
RS-232C Specifications and Commands ..... 4
Dimensions ..................................................... 6
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 14
-10
Accessories
Remote control RRMCGA342WJSA
Two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)
Power cord
*
For U.S., Canada, etc. (12' (3.6 m)) QACCDA010WJPZ
For Europe, except U.K. (6' (1.8 m)) QACCVA011WJPZ
*Use the power cord that corresponds to the wall outlet in your country.
3 RCA to 15-pin D-sub cable (9'10'' (3.0 m)) AN-C3CP
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (5 57/64'' (15 cm)) AN-A1RS
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Note
Some of the optional accessories may not be available depending on the region. Please check with your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
Projector manual and technical reference CD-ROM UDSKAA053WJZZ
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
USB cable (9'10" (3.0 m)) QCNWGA014WJPZ
Lens cap (attached) RCAPHA021WJSA
Supplied accessories
Some accessories (Remote control and Power cord etc.) are placed in the pocket of the storage case when shipped from the factory.
Optional accessories
RGB cable (9'10" (3.0 m)) QCNWGA045WJPZ
For U.K., Hong Kong and Singapore (6' (1.8 m)) QACCBA036WJPZ
For Australia, New Zealand and Oceania (6' (1.8 m)) QACCLA018WJPZ
Storage case GCASNA014WJSA
“QUICK GUIDE” label TLABZA793WJZZ
Operation manual (this manual)
TINS-B526WJZZ
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 15
-11
Introduction
30
30
40
MENU button
For displaying adjustment
and setting screens.
48
AUTO SYNC button
For automatically
adjusting images when
connected to a computer.
40
ENTER button
For setting items selected
or adjusted on the menu.
31
KEYSTONE button
For entering the Keystone
Correction mode.
29
STANDBY button
For putting the projector into
standby mode.
29
ON button
For turning the power on.
15
Remote control sensor
40
Adjustment buttons ('/"/\/|)
For selecting menu items and other settings.
56
Speaker
35
PICTURE MODE button
For switching the picture mode.
33
INPUT buttons
For switching the input mode 1, 2, 3 or 4.
32
ZOOM/FOCUS button
For adjusting the projected image size or adjusting the focus.
33
Volume buttons
For adjusting the speaker sound level.
12·62
Temperature warning indicator
12·62
Lamp indicator
12
Power indicator
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Front adjustment foot
(on the bottom of
the projector)
Projector
Part Names and Functions
Attaching the lens cap
Push the lens cap on until it clicks into position.
Removing the lens cap
Pull the lens cap directly outward.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Top View
Front View
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 16
-6
1. Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated.
2. Retain Instructions
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
3. Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
4. Follow Instructions
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
5. Cleaning
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
6. Attachments
Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7. Water and Moisture
Do not use this product near water–for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like.
8. Accessories
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturers instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9. Transportation
A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn.
10. Ventilation
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturers instructions have been adhered to.
11. Power Sources
This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12. Grounding or Polarization
This product is provided with one of the following types of plugs. If the plug should fail to fit into the power outlet, please contact your electrician. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
a. Two-wire type (mains) plug. b. Three-wire grounding type (mains) plug with a
grounding terminal. This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product.
14. Lightning
For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.
15. Overloading
Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
17. Servicing
Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
18. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged. b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into
the product. c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water. d. If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions, as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to normal
operation. e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way. f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance, this indicates a need for service.
19. Replacement Parts
When replacement parts are required, ensure that the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.
20. Safety Check
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition.
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
This product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
22. Heat
This product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This product has been engineered and manufactured to assure your personal safety. BUT IMPROPER USE CAN RESULT IN POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARDS. In order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated in this product, observe the following basic rules for its installation, use and servicing.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction. Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Red on
...
Normal (Standby)
Green on
...
Normal (Power on)
Temperature warning indicator
Off
...
Normal
Red on
...
The internal temperature is abnormally high. (See page 62.)
Lamp indicator
Green on
...
Normal
Green blinks
...
The lamp is warming up or shutting down.
Red on
...
The lamp has been shut down abnormally or
needs to be changed. (See page 62.)
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label (supplied) on the projector will help you check the setup procedure. Ensure to attach the “QUICK GUIDE” Label on the top cabinet of the projector as shown in the drawing on the right. Do not attach the “QUICK GUIDE” label anywhere else to avoid blocking an air intake or exhaust vent.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
For putting the projector into
standby mode.
32
ZOOM buttons
For adjusting the projected
image size.
31
KEYSTONE button
For entering the Keystone
Correction mode.
L-CLICK/ENTER button
For the Left click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable. For setting items selected or adjusted on the menu.
35
FREEZE button
For freezing images.
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
For enlarging/reducing part of the
image.
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
For switching to the respective
input modes.
48
AUTO SYNC button
For automatically adjusting images
when connected to a computer.
RESIZE button
For switching the screen size (NORMAL, BORDER, etc.).
36
PICTURE MODE button
For switching the picture mode.
35
Volume buttons
For adjusting the speaker sound level.
33
AV MUTE button
For temporarily displaying the black screen and turning off the sound.
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
For the Right click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable. For undoing an operation or returning to the previous display.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
For moving the computer cursor when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable. For selecting menu items.
MENU button
For displaying adjustment and setting screens.
40
FOCUS buttons
For bringing the projected image into focus.
32
ON button
For turning the power on.
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
7 STANDBY
button
5 ZOOM buttons
3 ON button
5 FOCUS buttons
6 INPUT1 button
4 HEIGHT ADJUST button
3 ON button 7 STNADBY button
6 INPUT buttons 5 ZOOM/FOCUS button
5
·
6
Adjustment buttons
( / / / )
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case. Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
R-CLICK button
L-CLICK button
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen. Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection. If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input. When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com- mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To S-video output terminal
S-video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 4 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To video output terminal
Composite video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 3 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps). When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector. Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector. When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to 1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size ( 1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed. When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change. When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37. To return to the standard image, press while
RESIZE” is displayed on the screen. This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 600)
XGA (1024 768)
SXGA (1280 960)
SXGA+ (1400 1050)
SXGA (1280 1024)
1280 720
1024 768
960 768
800 600
1280 960
1400 1050
1280 1024
768 576
720 576
1024 576
960 576
1024 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON). You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON). For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen. When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF). You can make corrections manually when you
want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings. Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator Lamp indicator Temperature warning indicator
Maintenance Indicators
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury. Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 17
-13
Introduction
Projector (Rear View)
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Audio output terminal of
equipment connected to the
AUDIO INPUT terminal.
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Shared audio input terminal
for INPUT 1 and 2.
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
·
Shared computer RGB and component signals output terminal for INPUT 1 and 2.
· Terminal for connecting a monitor.
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment.
26
INPUT 4 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment with an S-video terminal.
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and 4.
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
Terminal for controlling the projector using a computer.
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
The speed and pitch of the cooling fan may change during operation in response to internal temperature changes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
29
AC socket
Connect the supplied Power cord.
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
Inserting the Batteries
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
Usable Range
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
Remote control sensor
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
23' (7 m)
30°
30°
30°
Front View
Rear View
30°
30°
30°
Remote control sensor
23' (7 m)
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting the computer. (See page 23.) Connecting video equipment with component output terminal (DVD player, DTV decoder, DVD recorder with hard disc, etc.). (See page 25.)
INPUT 3 terminal
Connecting video equipment without S-video output terminal. (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 1 and
2.) (See pages 23 and 25.)
INPUT 4 terminal
Connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal (VCR, DVD player, etc.). (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and
4.) (See page 26.)
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
Connecting the monitor when you want to simultaneously watch the projection image on the monitor. (See page 28.)
USB terminal
Connecting the computer using a USB cable. (See page 23.)
RS-232C terminal
Connecting the computer to control the projector. (See page 27.)
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio output terminal for INPUT 1, 2 , 3 and 4.) (See pages 28.)
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
To audio output terminal
To RGB output terminal
To USB terminal
*
ø3.5 mm stereo or mono audio cable
(commercially available or available as Sharp service part QCNWGA038WJPZ)
USB cable Connect to use the remote control as a wireless computer mouse.
To USB terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
Computer
To AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
RGB cable
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
To audio output terminal
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
To component video output terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
To AUDIO
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Switching the INPUT Mode
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Adjusting the Volume
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
To adjust the pro- jected image while viewing it
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Emphasizing the Contrast
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Adjusting the Color Temperature
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
Setting a Password
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
Changing the Password
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If You Forget Your Password
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Setting the Audio Output Type
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
Reversing/Inverting Pro- jected Images
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Cleaning
Paper
Mild detergent
diluted with water
Wax
Thinner
Mild detergent
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 18
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Red on
...
Normal (Standby)
Green on
...
Normal (Power on)
Temperature warning indicator
Off
...
Normal
Red on
...
The internal temperature is abnormally high. (See page 62.)
Lamp indicator
Green on
...
Normal
Green blinks
...
The lamp is warming up or shutting down.
Red on
...
The lamp has been shut down abnormally or
needs to be changed. (See page 62.)
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
For putting the projector into
standby mode.
32
ZOOM buttons
For adjusting the projected
image size.
31
KEYSTONE button
For entering the Keystone
Correction mode.
L-CLICK/ENTER button
For the Left click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable.
For setting items selected or adjusted on the menu.
35
FREEZE button
For freezing images.
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
For enlarging/reducing part of the
image.
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
For switching to the respective
input modes.
48
AUTO SYNC button
For automatically adjusting images
when connected to a computer.
RESIZE button
For switching the screen size (NORMAL, BORDER, etc.).
36
PICTURE MODE button
For switching the picture mode.
35
Volume buttons
For adjusting the speaker sound level.
33
AV MUTE button
For temporarily displaying the black screen and turning off the sound.
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
For the Right click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable.
For undoing an operation or returning to the previous display.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
For moving the computer cursor
when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable.
For selecting menu items.
MENU button
For displaying adjustment and setting screens.
40
FOCUS buttons
For bringing the projected image into focus.
32
ON button
For turning the power on.
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
7 STANDBY
button
5 ZOOM buttons
3 ON button
5 FOCUS buttons
6 INPUT1 button
4 HEIGHT ADJUST button
3 ON button 7 STNADBY button
6 INPUT buttons 5 ZOOM/FOCUS button
5
·
6
Adjustment buttons
('/"/\/|)
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
R-CLICK button
L-CLICK button
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/ \/|).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To S-video output terminal
S-video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 4 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To video output terminal
Composite video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 3 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
×1 ×4 ×9 ×16 ×36 ×64×2 ×3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
"On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en-
larged image using ', ", \ and |.
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
×
×
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
'/"/\/|
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press \ or | to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press ' or " to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator Lamp indicator Temperature warning indicator
Maintenance Indicators
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ",
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
" button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 19
-13
Introduction
Projector (Rear View)
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Audio output terminal of
equipment connected to the
AUDIO INPUT terminal.
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Shared audio input terminal
for INPUT 1 and 2.
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
·
Shared computer RGB and component signals output terminal for INPUT 1 and 2.
· Terminal for connecting a monitor.
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment.
26
INPUT 4 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment with an S-video terminal.
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and 4.
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
Terminal for controlling the projector using a computer.
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
The speed and pitch of the cooling fan may change during operation in response to internal temperature changes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
29
AC socket
Connect the supplied Power cord.
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
Inserting the Batteries
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
Usable Range
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
Remote control sensor
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
23' (7 m)
30°
30°
30°
Front View
Rear View
30°
30°
30°
Remote control sensor
23' (7 m)
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting the computer. (See page 23.) Connecting video equipment with component output terminal (DVD player, DTV decoder, DVD recorder with hard disc, etc.). (See page 25.)
INPUT 3 terminal
Connecting video equipment without S-video output terminal. (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 1 and
2.) (See pages 23 and 25.)
INPUT 4 terminal
Connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal (VCR, DVD player, etc.). (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and
4.) (See page 26.)
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
Connecting the monitor when you want to simultaneously watch the projection image on the monitor. (See page 28.)
USB terminal
Connecting the computer using a USB cable. (See page 23.)
RS-232C terminal
Connecting the computer to control the projector. (See page 27.)
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio output terminal for INPUT 1, 2 , 3 and 4.) (See pages 28.)
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
To audio output terminal
To RGB output terminal
To USB terminal
*
ø3.5 mm stereo or mono audio cable
(commercially available or available as Sharp service part QCNWGA038WJPZ)
USB cable Connect to use the remote control as a wireless computer mouse.
To USB terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
Computer
To AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
RGB cable
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup.
Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA
DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
To audio output terminal
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
To component video output terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
To AUDIO
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Switching the INPUT Mode
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Adjusting the Volume
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video
Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
To adjust the pro- jected image while viewing it
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Emphasizing the Contrast
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Adjusting the Color Temperature
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
Setting a Password
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
Changing the Password
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If You Forget Your Password
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Setting the Audio Output Type
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
Reversing/Inverting Pro- jected Images
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens.
As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector.
The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet.
Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth.
When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a
mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Cleaning
Paper
Mild detergent
diluted with water
Wax
Thinner
Mild detergent
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 20
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
11
Other connected equipment
Using the projector in other countries
Temperature monitor function
62
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Red on
...
Normal (Standby)
Green on
...
Normal (Power on)
Temperature warning indicator
Off
...
Normal
Red on
...
The internal temperature is abnormally high. (See page 62.)
Lamp indicator
Green on
...
Normal
Green blinks
...
The lamp is warming up or shutting down.
Red on
...
The lamp has been shut down abnormally or
needs to be changed. (See page 62.)
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
For putting the projector into
standby mode.
32
ZOOM buttons
For adjusting the projected
image size.
31
KEYSTONE button
For entering the Keystone
Correction mode.
L-CLICK/ENTER button
For the Left click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable. For setting items selected or adjusted on the menu.
35
FREEZE button
For freezing images.
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
For enlarging/reducing part of the
image.
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
For switching to the respective
input modes.
48
AUTO SYNC button
For automatically adjusting images
when connected to a computer.
RESIZE button
For switching the screen size (NORMAL, BORDER, etc.).
36
PICTURE MODE button
For switching the picture mode.
35
Volume buttons
For adjusting the speaker sound level.
33
AV MUTE button
For temporarily displaying the black screen and turning off the sound.
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
For the Right click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable.
For undoing an operation or returning to the previous display.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
For moving the computer cursor
when connecting the projector
USB terminal to the computer
with USB cable.
For selecting menu items.
MENU button
For displaying adjustment and setting screens.
40
FOCUS buttons
For bringing the projected image into focus.
32
ON button
For turning the power on.
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
7 STANDBY
button
5 ZOOM buttons
3 ON button
5 FOCUS buttons
6 INPUT1 button
4 HEIGHT ADJUST button
3 ON button 7 STNADBY button
6 INPUT buttons 5 ZOOM/FOCUS button
5
·
6
Adjustment buttons
('/"/\/|)
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
23
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
R-CLICK button
L-CLICK button
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
' "
\ |
When left-clicking
When right-clicking
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To S-video output terminal
S-video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 4 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To video output terminal
Composite video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 3 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
56
31
Info
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
"On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
' " \ |
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
36 37
49
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Image Projection
' " \ |
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Info
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
31
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
2 Press \ or | to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
3
Press ' or " to select the desired
language, and then press
.
4 Press .
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator Lamp indicator Temperature warning indicator
Maintenance Indicators
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
63
About the lamp indicator
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Info
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
1 Connect the power cord.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
"
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
" button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
France Sharp Electronics France
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Auto Sync
Background
Border
Clock
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Dot by dot
Intelligent compression
Keylock
Keystone Correction
Password
Phase
Picture Mode
Resize
sRGB
Stretch
System Lock
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 21
-17
Quick Start
Page 30
4. Adjust the angle
5. Adjust the focus and the zoom
Page 32
7. Turn the Power off
Page 29
6. Select the INPUT mode
Page 33
HEIGHT ADJUST button
••
••
This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected image. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
2 2
2 2
2 Adjust the projected image size
••
••
Adjust the projected image size by adjusting zoom.
On the remote control
Adjust by pressing the
ZOOM buttons.
On the projector
1 1
1 1
1 Bring the projected image into focus
••
••
Bring the projected image into focus by adjusting the focus.
On the remote control
Adjust by pressing the
FOCUS buttons.
On the projector
Select the “INPUT 1” using the INPUT buttons on the projector or the INPUT1 button on the remote control.
••
••
When pressing
''
''
'/
""
""
" on the projector, input mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
••
••
When using the remote control, press / / / to switch the INPUT mode.
On the remote
control
On the
projector
""
""
" On-screen Display (RGB)
Press the STANDBY button, then press that button again while the confirmation message is displayed, to put the projector into standby mode.
••
••
Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet after the cooling fan stops.
On the remote controlOn the projector
""
""
" On-screen Display
1 Press .
2 Adjust by pressing \ or |.
1 Press .
2 Adjust by pressing ' or ".
Adjust the projector angle
••
••
Adjust the projector angle using the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 22
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 23
-19
Setup
Setting up the Projector
Position the projector perpendicular to the screen with the projector’s feet flat and level to achieve an optimal image.
Note
The projector lens should be centered in the middle of the screen. If the horizontal line passing through the lens center is not perpendicular to the screen, the image will be distorted, making viewing difficult.
For an optimal image, position the screen so that it is not in direct sunlight or room light. Light falling directly on the screen washes out the colors, making viewing difficult. Close the curtains and dim the lights when setting up the projector in a sunny or bright room.
Standard Setup (Front Projection)
Place the projector at the required distance from the screen according to the desired picture size. (For details, refer to page 2 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM.)
Setting up the Projector
300"
200"
100"
84" 60"
240"
´
180"
Projection Distance
160"
´
120"
80"
´
60"
67"
´
50"
48"
´
36"
29'9
"
44'9
"
(9.1 m – 13.7 m)
19'10
"–
29'10
"
(6.0 m
9.1 m)
9'11
"–
14'11
"
(3.0 m
4.6 m)
8'4
"–
12'6
"
(2.5 m
3.8 m)
5'11
"–
8'11
"
(1.8 m – 2.7 m)
Picture Size
Indication of the Projection Image Size and Projection Distance
For details, refer to page 2 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM. Example : NORMAL Mode (4:3)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 24
-20
Projecting a Reversed Image
Projection from behind the Screen
Place a translucent screen between the projector and the audience.
Reverse the image by setting “Rear” in the “PRJ Mode” menu. (See page 57.)
Projection Using a Mirror
Place a mirror (normal flat type) in front of the lens.
When the translucent screen is placed between the mirror and audience, set to “Front” in the “PRJ Mode”
menu. (See page 57.)
When the mirror is placed on the audience side, set to “Rear” in the “PRJ Mode” menu. (See page
57.)
Info
When using a mirror, ensure that both the projector and the mirror are carefully placed so the projected light does not shine into the eyes of the audience.
Ceiling-mount Setup
It is recommended that you use the optional Sharp ceiling-mount bracket for this installation. Before mounting the projector, contact your nearest Sharp Au­thorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to obtain the recom­mended ceiling-mount bracket (sold separately).
AN-MBCM10 ceiling-mount bracket, its AN-EP101B extension
tube and AN-JT200 universal bracket, adaptor for non-level ceiling installation (for U.S.A.).
AN-60KT ceiling-mount bracket, its AN-TK201 and AN-TK202
extension tubes (for countries other than the U.S.A.).
Invert the image by setting “Ceiling + Front” in “PRJ Mode”. See page
57 for use of this function.
Setting up the Projector
Translucent screen
Audience
Set to “Front”
Audience
Translucent screen
Mirror
Set to “Rear”
Audience
Mirror
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 25
-13
Introduction
Projector (Rear View)
Using the Kensington Lock
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Audio output terminal of
equipment connected to the
AUDIO INPUT terminal.
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Shared audio input terminal
for INPUT 1 and 2.
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
·
Shared computer RGB and component signals output terminal for INPUT 1 and 2.
· Terminal for connecting a monitor.
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment.
26
INPUT 4 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment with an S-video terminal.
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and 4.
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
Terminal for controlling the projector using a computer.
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
The speed and pitch of the cooling fan may change during operation in response to internal temperature changes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
29
AC socket
Connect the supplied Power cord.
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
Inserting the Batteries
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Usable Range
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
When using the remote control:
Remote control sensor
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
23' (7 m)
30
30
30
Front View
Rear View
30
30
30
Remote control sensor
23' (7 m)
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting the computer. (See page 23.) Connecting video equipment with component output terminal (DVD player, DTV decoder, DVD recorder with hard disc, etc.). (See page 25.)
INPUT 3 terminal
Connecting video equipment without S-video output terminal. (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 1 and
2.) (See pages 23 and 25.)
INPUT 4 terminal
Connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal (VCR, DVD player, etc.). (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and
4.) (See page 26.)
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
Connecting the monitor when you want to simultaneously watch the projection image on the monitor. (See page 28.)
USB terminal
Connecting the computer using a USB cable. (See page 23.)
RS-232C terminal
Connecting the computer to control the projector. (See page 27.)
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio output terminal for INPUT 1, 2 , 3 and 4.) (See pages 28.)
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
To audio output terminal
To RGB output terminal
To USB terminal
*
ø3.5 mm stereo or mono audio cable
(commercially available or available as Sharp service part QCNWGA038WJPZ)
USB cable Connect to use the remote control as a wireless computer mouse.
To USB terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
Computer
To AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
RGB cable
24 67
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
To audio output terminal
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
To component video output terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
To AUDIO
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
36
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
3 Press .
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Switching the INPUT Mode
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input mode switches in order of :
50
About the INPUT mode
Adjusting the Volume
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
INPUT 3 mode
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
To adjust the pro- jected image while viewing it
Press .
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
5 Press .
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Emphasizing the Contrast
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Adjusting the Color Temperature
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
Setting a Password
There is no factory preset for the password, so the “Options2” menu is enabled. If you do not want others to operate the “Op- tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Changing the Password
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
If You Forget Your Password
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
54
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Setting the Audio Output Type
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
Reversing/Inverting Pro- jected Images
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
20
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Info
Cleaning the projector
Maintenance
Cleaning
Paper
Mild detergent
diluted with water
Wax
Thinner
Mild detergent
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
7
70
61.
65
70
Info
7
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit
Info
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Warning!
2 Disconnect the power cord.
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 26
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction. Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case. Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen. Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection. If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input. When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com- mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps). When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector. Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector. When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to 1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size ( 1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed. When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change. When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37. To return to the standard image, press while
RESIZE” is displayed on the screen. This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 600)
XGA (1024 768)
SXGA (1280 960)
SXGA+ (1400 1050)
SXGA (1280 1024)
1280 720
1024 768
960 768
800 600
1280 960
1400 1050
1280 1024
768 576
720 576
1024 576
960 576
1024 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON). You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON). For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen. When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF). You can make corrections manually when you
want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings. Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury. Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 27
-13
Introduction
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Audio output terminal of
equipment connected to the
AUDIO INPUT terminal.
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Shared audio input terminal
for INPUT 1 and 2.
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
·
Shared computer RGB and component signals output terminal for INPUT 1 and 2.
· Terminal for connecting a monitor.
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment.
26
INPUT 4 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment with an S-video terminal.
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and 4.
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
Terminal for controlling the projector using a computer.
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
The speed and pitch of the cooling fan may change during operation in response to internal temperature changes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
29
AC socket
Connect the supplied Power cord.
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
Remote control sensor
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
23' (7 m)
30°
30°
30°
Front View
Rear View
30°
30°
30°
Remote control sensor
23' (7 m)
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting the computer. (See page 23.) Connecting video equipment with component output terminal (DVD player, DTV decoder, DVD recorder with hard disc, etc.). (See page 25.)
INPUT 3 terminal
Connecting video equipment without S-video output terminal. (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 1 and
2.) (See pages 23 and 25.)
INPUT 4 terminal
Connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal (VCR, DVD player, etc.). (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and
4.) (See page 26.)
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
Connecting the monitor when you want to simultaneously watch the projection image on the monitor. (See page 28.)
USB terminal
Connecting the computer using a USB cable. (See page 23.)
RS-232C terminal
Connecting the computer to control the projector. (See page 27.)
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio output terminal for INPUT 1, 2 , 3 and 4.) (See pages 28.)
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
To audio output terminal
To RGB output terminal
To USB terminal
*
ø3.5 mm stereo or mono audio cable
(commercially available or available as Sharp service part QCNWGA038WJPZ)
USB cable Connect to use the remote control as a wireless computer mouse.
To USB terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
Computer
To AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
RGB cable
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup.
Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA
DDC compatible computer.
RGB cable
USB cable
Supplied
accessories
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
To audio output terminal
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
To component video output terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
To AUDIO
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video
Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
4:3 aspect ratio
Letter box
Squeezed 16:9 image
Squeezed 4:3 image
16:9 aspect ratio
16:9 aspect ratio
(4:3 aspect ratio in
16:9 screen)
: Cutout area on which images cannot be projected. : Area on which the image is not included in the original signals.
*
Mode for projecting an image with the original aspect ratio without cutting any portions.
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens.
As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector.
The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet.
Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth.
When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a
mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Cleaning
Paper
Mild detergent
diluted with water
Wax
Thinner
Mild detergent
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 28
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it.
Do not use the projector by holding the lens.
When storing the projector, ensure to attach
the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.)
Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected.
Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Red on
...
Normal (Standby)
Green on
...
Normal (Power on)
Temperature warning indicator
Off
...
Normal
Red on
...
The internal temperature is abnormally high. (See page 62.)
Lamp indicator
Green on
...
Normal
Green blinks
...
The lamp is warming up or shutting down.
Red on
...
The lamp has been shut down abnormally or
needs to be changed. (See page 62.)
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
For putting the projector into
standby mode.
32
ZOOM buttons
For adjusting the projected
image size.
31
KEYSTONE button
For entering the Keystone
Correction mode.
L-CLICK/ENTER button
For the Left click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable. For setting items selected or adjusted on the menu.
35
FREEZE button
For freezing images.
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
For enlarging/reducing part of the
image.
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
For switching to the respective
input modes.
48
AUTO SYNC button
For automatically adjusting images
when connected to a computer.
RESIZE button
For switching the screen size (NORMAL, BORDER, etc.).
36
PICTURE MODE button
For switching the picture mode.
35
Volume buttons
For adjusting the speaker sound level.
33
AV MUTE button
For temporarily displaying the black screen and turning off the sound.
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
For the Right click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable.
For undoing an operation or returning to the previous display.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
For moving the computer cursor
when connecting the projector
USB terminal to the computer
with USB cable.
For selecting menu items.
MENU button
For displaying adjustment and setting screens.
40
FOCUS buttons
For bringing the projected image into focus.
32
ON button
For turning the power on.
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
7 STANDBY
button
5 ZOOM buttons
3 ON button
5 FOCUS buttons
6 INPUT1 button
4 HEIGHT ADJUST button
3 ON button 7 STNADBY button
6 INPUT buttons 5 ZOOM/FOCUS button
5
·
6
Adjustment buttons
('/"/\/|)
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
R-CLICK button
L-CLICK button
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/ \/|).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To S-video output terminal
S-video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 4 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To video output terminal
Composite video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 3 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
"On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en-
larged image using ', ", \ and |.
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
'/"/\/|
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press \ or | to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press ' or " to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator Lamp indicator Temperature warning indicator
Maintenance Indicators
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector.
If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and
the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49.
Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking.
When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally.
Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn
or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool
before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you
may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ",
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
" button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 29
-13
Introduction
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Audio output terminal of
equipment connected to the
AUDIO INPUT terminal.
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Shared audio input terminal
for INPUT 1 and 2.
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
·
Shared computer RGB and component signals output terminal for INPUT 1 and 2.
· Terminal for connecting a monitor.
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment.
26
INPUT 4 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment with an S-video terminal.
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and 4.
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
Terminal for controlling the projector using a computer.
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
The speed and pitch of the cooling fan may change during operation in response to internal temperature changes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
29
AC socket
Connect the supplied Power cord.
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
Remote control sensor
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
23' (7 m)
30°
30°
30°
Front View
Rear View
30°
30°
30°
Remote control sensor
23' (7 m)
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting the computer. (See page 23.) Connecting video equipment with component output terminal (DVD player, DTV decoder, DVD recorder with hard disc, etc.). (See page 25.)
INPUT 3 terminal
Connecting video equipment without S-video output terminal. (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 1 and
2.) (See pages 23 and 25.)
INPUT 4 terminal
Connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal (VCR, DVD player, etc.). (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and
4.) (See page 26.)
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
Connecting the monitor when you want to simultaneously watch the projection image on the monitor. (See page 28.)
USB terminal
Connecting the computer using a USB cable. (See page 23.)
RS-232C terminal
Connecting the computer to control the projector. (See page 27.)
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio output terminal for INPUT 1, 2 , 3 and 4.) (See pages 28.)
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
To audio output terminal
To RGB output terminal
To USB terminal
*
ø3.5 mm stereo or mono audio cable
(commercially available or available as Sharp service part QCNWGA038WJPZ)
USB cable Connect to use the remote control as a wireless computer mouse.
To USB terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
Computer
To AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
RGB cable
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
To audio output terminal
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
To component video output terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
To AUDIO
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Cleaning
Paper
Mild detergent
diluted with water
Wax
Thinner
Mild detergent
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 30
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator
Red on
...
Normal (Standby)
Green on
...
Normal (Power on)
Temperature warning indicator
Off
...
Normal
Red on
...
The internal temperature is abnormally high. (See page 62.)
Lamp indicator
Green on
...
Normal
Green blinks
...
The lamp is warming up or shutting down.
Red on
...
The lamp has been shut down abnormally or
needs to be changed. (See page 62.)
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
29
STANDBY button
For putting the projector into
standby mode.
32
ZOOM buttons
For adjusting the projected
image size.
31
KEYSTONE button
For entering the Keystone
Correction mode.
L-CLICK/ENTER button
For the Left click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable. For setting items selected or adjusted on the menu.
35
FREEZE button
For freezing images.
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
For enlarging/reducing part of the
image.
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
For switching to the respective
input modes.
48
AUTO SYNC button
For automatically adjusting images
when connected to a computer.
RESIZE button
For switching the screen size (NORMAL, BORDER, etc.).
36
PICTURE MODE button
For switching the picture mode.
35
Volume buttons
For adjusting the speaker sound level.
33
AV MUTE button
For temporarily displaying the black screen and turning off the sound.
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
For the Right click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable.
For undoing an operation or returning to the previous display.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
For moving the computer cursor
when connecting the projector
USB terminal to the computer
with USB cable.
For selecting menu items.
MENU button
For displaying adjustment and setting screens.
40
FOCUS buttons
For bringing the projected image into focus.
32
ON button
For turning the power on.
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
7 STANDBY
button
5 ZOOM buttons
3 ON button
5 FOCUS buttons
6 INPUT1 button
4 HEIGHT ADJUST button
3 ON button 7 STNADBY button
6 INPUT buttons 5 ZOOM/FOCUS button
5
·
6
Adjustment buttons
( / / / )
Page 19
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
R-CLICK button
L-CLICK button
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To S-video output terminal
S-video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 4 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To video output terminal
Composite video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 3 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator Lamp indicator Temperature warning indicator
Maintenance Indicators
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 31
-13
Introduction
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 32
-28
RGB cable
Supplied
accessory
Connecting to a Monitor with RGB Input Terminal
You can display computer images on both the projector and a separate monitor using two sets of RGB cables.
Note
RGB signals and Component signals can be output to the monitor.
For this connection, another RGB cable (commercially available) is required.
Connecting to an Amplifier or Other Audio Equipment
Audio signals input from equipment connected to each audio input terminal of the projector can be output to audio equipment.
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
Turn off the power of both the projector and audio equipment when connecting.
When turning off the power in the case of connecting an amplifier or other audio equipment, first turn off
the power of the amplifier and then turn off the power of the projector.
By using external audio components, the volume can be amplified for better sound.
For details on Variable Audio Output (VAO) and Fixed Audio Output (FAO), see page 57.
To audio input terminal
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Amplifier
To RGB input terminal
RGB cable (commercially available)
RGB cable
To RGB output terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
To OUTPUT(INPUT 1, 2) terminal
Monitor
Computer
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 33
-29
Basic Operation
Turning the Projector On/Off
Info
English is the factory preset language. If you want to change the on-screen display to another language, change the language according to the procedure on page 60.
Lamp indicator
Power indicator
STANDBY button
ON button
ON button
STANDBY button
On-screen Display
Info
Do not unplug the power cord during projection or cool­ing fan operation. The cooling fan in this projector contin­ues to run for about 90 seconds after the projector enters the standby mode. This can cause damage due to rise in internal temperature, as the cooling fan also stops.
Power cord
Supplied accessory
Connecting the Power Cord
Plug the supplied power cord into the AC socket on the rear of the projector.
Turning the Projector on
Before performing the steps in this section, connect any equipment that you use with the projector. (See pages 23-28.)
Remove the lens cap and press on the
projector or on the remote control.
The power indicator illuminates green.
After the lamp indicator illuminates, the projec-
tor is ready to start operation.
When System Lock is set, the keycode input screen appears. Enter the right keycode to start projection. See page 53 for details.
Note
The lamp indicator illuminates or blinks, in-
dicating the status of the lamp.
Green: The lamp is ready. Blinking green: The lamp is warming up
or shutting down.
Red:
The lamp is shut down abnor­mally or the lamp should be replaced.
When switching on the projector, a slight flicker­ing of the image may be experienced within the first minute after the lamp has been illuminated. This is normal operation as the lamp's control circuitry is stabilizing the lamp output charac­teristics. This does not indicate malfunction.
If the projector is put into standby mode and
immediately turned on again, the lamp may take some time to illuminate.
Turning the Power off
(Putting
the Projector into Standby Mode)
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control, then press that button again while the confir­mation message is displayed, to put the projector into standby mode.
2
Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet after the cooling fan stops.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 34
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Side View
Lens center
Top View
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
STRETCH
Output screen image
Input Signal
Image type
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER
4:3 aspect ratio
4:3 aspect ratio
4:3 aspect ratio
5:4 aspect ratio
16:9 aspect ratio
: Cutout area on which images cannot be projected. : Area where the signals are off screen.
*
Mode for projecting an image with the original aspect ratio without cutting any portions.
***
**
**
**
*
Computer
Resolution lower than
XGA
XGA
Resolution
higher than
XGA
1280 720
SXGA (1280 1024)
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 35
-13
Introduction
Projector (Rear View)
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
Inserting the Batteries
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
Usable Range
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
"On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press ', | or ", \ on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the
''
''
',
||
||
| or
""
""
",
\\
\\
\ buttons
on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Switching the INPUT Mode
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing
''
''
' or
""
""
" on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Adjusting the Volume
Press
\\
\\
\/
||
||
| on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or \ will lower the volume. Pressing or | will raise the volume.
"On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
"On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
To adjust the pro- jected image while viewing it
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing
''
''
' or
""
""
", the following
item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press
\\
\\
\ or
||
||
| to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Emphasizing the Contrast
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Adjusting the Color Temperature
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
Setting a Password
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press
||
||
|.
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
Changing the Password
1 Press
''
''
',
""
""
" and
||
||
| to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press
''
''
',
""
""
" and
||
||
| to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If You Forget Your Password
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Setting the Audio Output Type
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
Reversing/Inverting Pro- jected Images
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw (1) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover (2).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 36
-32
Image Projection
ZOOM/FOCUS button
Adjustment buttons ('/"/\/|)
ZOOM buttons
FOCUS buttons
Note
After you have pressed the FOCUS buttons or ZOOM buttons on the remote control, or after you have pressed the ZOOM/FOCUS button on the projector, you can display the test pattern by pressing the ENTER button. The test pattern is useful for making more accurate adjustments.
Adjust by pressing the ZOOM buttons.
1 Press .
2 Adjust by pressing
' or ".
Adjusting the Focus
When adjusting the focus using the buttons
on the projector on the remote control
Adjusting the Projected Image Size
When adjusting zoom using the buttons
on the projector on the remote control
1 Press .
2 Adjust by pressing
\ or |.
Adjust by pressing the FOCUS buttons.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 37
-13
Introduction
Projector (Rear View)
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
Inserting the Batteries
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
Usable Range
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup.
Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA
DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
"On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press ', | or ", \ on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the
''
''
',
||
||
| or
""
""
",
\\
\\
\ buttons
on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Switching the INPUT Mode
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing
''
''
' or
""
""
" on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Adjusting the Volume
Press
\\
\\
\/
||
||
| on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or \ will lower the volume. Pressing or | will raise the volume.
"On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video
Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
"On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
To adjust the pro- jected image while viewing it
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing
''
''
' or
""
""
", the following
item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press
\\
\\
\ or
||
||
| to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Emphasizing the Contrast
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Adjusting the Color Temperature
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
Setting a Password
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press
||
||
|.
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
Changing the Password
1 Press
''
''
',
""
""
" and
||
||
| to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press
''
''
',
""
""
" and
||
||
| to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If You Forget Your Password
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Setting the Audio Output Type
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
Reversing/Inverting Pro- jected Images
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens.
As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector.
The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet.
Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth.
When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a
mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw (1) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover (2).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 38
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
' " \ |
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
' " \ |
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/ \/|).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
×1 ×4 ×9 ×16 ×36 ×64×2 ×3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
"On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en-
larged image using ', ", \ and |.
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
×
×
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
'/"/\/|
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press \ or | to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press ' or " to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ",
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
" button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 39
-35
Basic Operation
Freezing a Moving Image
1 Press on the remote control.
The projected image is frozen.
2 Press again to return to the
moving image from the currently connected equipment.
Selecting the Picture Mode
You can select the suitable picture mode for the projected image, such as movie or video game.
Press on the remote control.
When pressing , the picture mode changes in order of
Note
You can also use on the projector.
Press to return to the “STANDARD”
mode.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 44).
STANDARD PRESENTATION CINEMA GAME
FREEZE button
PICTURE MODE button
UNDO button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 40
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
' " \ |
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
' " \ |
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/ \/|).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Side View
Lens center
Top View
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
×1 ×4 ×9 ×16 ×36 ×64×2 ×3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
"On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en-
larged image using ', ", \ and |.
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
STRETCH
Output screen image
Input Signal
Image type
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER
4:3 aspect ratio
4:3 aspect ratio
4:3 aspect ratio
5:4 aspect ratio
16:9 aspect ratio
: Cutout area on which images cannot be projected. : Area where the signals are off screen.
*
Mode for projecting an image with the original aspect ratio without cutting any portions.
***
**
**
**
*
Computer
Resolution lower than
XGA
XGA
Resolution
higher than
XGA
1280 × 720
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
'/"/\/|
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press \ or | to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press ' or " to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ",
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
" button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 41
-13
Introduction
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
RGB cable
USB cable
Supplied
accessories
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080I signals are entered.
4:3 aspect ratio
Letter box
Squeezed 16:9 image
Squeezed 4:3 image
16:9 aspect ratio
16:9 aspect ratio
(4:3 aspect ratio in
16:9 screen)
Output screen image
Input Signal
Image typeDVD / Video
480I, 480P,
NTSC, PAL, SECAM
540P, 720P,
1080I (16:9)
: Cutout area on which images cannot be projected. : Area on which the image is not included in the original signals.
*
Mode for projecting an image with the original aspect ratio without cutting any portions.
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
BORDER STRETCH
NORMAL
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 42
-38
Menu Items
The following shows the items that can be set in the projector.
Note
When using the INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 mode:
“Fine Sync” menu is only displayed when the projector input is INPUT 1 or INPUT 2.
“Picture” menu
“Fine Sync” menu
INPUT 1 (RGB) / INPUT 2 (RGB)
INPUT 1 (Component) / INPUT 2 (Component) INPUT 3 / INPUT 4
INPUT 1 / INPUT 2
+30-30
+30-30
+30-30
+30-30
+30-30
+30-30
+100
Signal Type
Auto RGB Component
Tint
Color
Reset
Sharp
Bright
+30-30
Contrast
Red
Blue
Bright Boost
sRGB [ON/OFF]
Picture
5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Main Menu Sub Menu
CLR Temp
Page 44
Page 45
Page 44
Page 44
Page 45
Page 46
Page 44
Page 46
Picture Mode
Standard Presentation Cinema Game
*1
*1
*1
*2
*3
*1 Items when inputting component signal through INPUT 1 or INPUT 2, or
when selecting INPUT 3 or INPUT 4 *2 Item when inputting RGB signal through INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 *3 Item when selecting INPUT 1 or INPUT 2
Fine Sync
+15-15
+30-30
+30-30
+30-30
Clock
Phase
H-Pos
V-Pos
Reset
Signal Info
Special Modes
Main Menu
Auto Sync [ON/OFF]
Page 47
Page 47
Page 47
Page 48
Page 48
*4
*4 Item when inputting RGB signal through INPUT 1 or INPUT 2
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 43
-39
Useful Features
“Options1” menu
“Language” menu
“Options2” menu
Example: INPUT 3/INPUT 4
Lamp Timer(Life)
Options1
Main Menu Sub Menu
OSD Display [ON/OFF]
Auto PAL NTSC3.58 SECAM NTSC4.43 PAL-M PAL-N PAL-60
Video System
Background
Logo Blue None
Normal Border Dot By Dot Stretch
Eco Mode [Eco/Standard]
Auto Power Off [ON/OFF]
System Lock
Center Upper Right Lower Right Upper Left Lower Left
Menu Position
Page 49
Page 50
Page 49
Resize
Page 49
Page 50
Page 51
Page 51
Page 52
Page 52
Pages 53 and 54
*2
*1
*1 Item when inputting RGB signal through INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 *2 Item when selecting INPUT 3 or INPUT 4
Main Menu
English Deutsch Español Nederlands Français Italiano Svenska Português
Language
Page 60
Monitor Out
RS-232C
Options2
Front Ceiling + Front Rear Ceiling + Rear
9600 bps 115200 bps
Enable Disable
Main Menu Sub Menu
PRJ Mode
Page 55
Page 55
Page 57
FAO VAO
Audio Out
Page 57
Page 58
Auto Keystone [ON/OFF]
Page 56
Page 58
Password
Old Password New Password Reconfirm
Speaker [ON/OFF]
Page 56
All Reset
Page 59
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 44
-40
The menu can be operated to achieve two functions, adjustments and settings. (For setting the menu items, see pages 42 and 43. )
Using the Menu Screen
Menu Selections (Adjustments)
Example: Adjusting “Bright”
This operation can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Menu icons
ENTER button
MENU button
UNDO button
MOUSE/ Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Adjustment buttons ('/"/\/|)
MENU button
ENTER button
Example: “Picture” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1 Press .
The “Picture” menu screen for the se­lected input mode is displayed.
2 Press
||
||
| or
\\
\\
\ to display the other
menu screens.
The menu icon for the selected menu screen is highlighted.
Note
The “Fine Sync” menu is not available for selecting INPUT 3 or INPUT 4.
Menu icon Menu screen
Picture
Fine Sync
Options1
Options2
Language
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 45
-13
Introduction
Projector (Rear View)
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
Inserting the Batteries
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
Usable Range
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
"On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press ', | or ", \ on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the
''
''
',
||
||
| or
""
""
",
\\
\\
\ buttons
on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Switching the INPUT Mode
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing
''
''
' or
""
""
" on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Adjusting the Volume
Press
\\
\\
\/
||
||
| on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or \ will lower the volume. Pressing or | will raise the volume.
"On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
"On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
To adjust the pro- jected image while viewing it
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing
''
''
' or
""
""
", the following
item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press
\\
\\
\ or
||
||
| to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Emphasizing the Contrast
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Adjusting the Color Temperature
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
Setting a Password
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press
||
||
|.
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
Changing the Password
1 Press
''
''
',
""
""
" and
||
||
| to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press
''
''
',
""
""
" and
||
||
| to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If You Forget Your Password
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Setting the Audio Output Type
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
Reversing/Inverting Pro- jected Images
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw (1) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover (2).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 46
-42
MOUSE/ Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
ENTER button
MENU button
UNDO button
Menu Selections (Settings)
Example: Setting “Menu Position”
This operation can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Menu icons
Example: “Options1” screen menu
The menu can be operated to achieve two functions, adjustments and settings. (For adjust­ing the menu items, see pages 40 and 41.)
Example: “Picture” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1 Press .
The “Picture” menu screen for the se­lected input mode is displayed.
2 Press
||
||
| or
\\
\\
\ to display the other
menu screens.
The menu icon for the selected menu screen is highlighted.
Note
The “Fine Sync” menu is not available for selecting INPUT 3 or INPUT 4.
Using the Menu Screen
Menu icon Menu screen
Picture
Fine Sync
Options1
Options2
Language
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 47
-43
Useful Features
Sub menu
3 Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to select the
item you want to set, and then press
||
||
| to display the sub menu.
The selected item is highlighted.
When you select “System Lock” on the
“Options1” menu or “Password” on the
“Options2” menu, press
.
Note
Press or \ to return to the previ- ous screen.
For some items, press \ or | to se- lect the icon using “
”.
4 Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to select the set-
ting of the item displayed in the sub menu.
5 Press .
The selected item is set.
6 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 48
-44
You can adjust the projector’s picture to your preferences using the “Picture” menu.
Picture Adjustment (“Picture” menu)
Selecting the Picture Mode
This function allows you to select the picture mode in accordance with brightness of the room or content of the image to be projected. In all picture modes, items on the “Picture” menu can be adjusted and saved.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Picture Modes
Note
You can also press on the projector or on the remote control to select the picture mode. (See page 35.)
Adjusting the Image
Select a picture mode before adjusting the im­age.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Adjustment Items
*1
“Color”, “Tint” and “Sharp” are not displayed when selecting INPUT 1/INPUT 2 and setting the “Sig­nal Type” to “RGB” or setting the “Signal Type” to “Auto” and the input signal is recognized as an RGB signal.
*2
“Red” and “Blue” cannot be adjusted when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
Note
“Sharp” can be adjusted when 480I, 480P, 540P, 576I, 576P, 720P, 1035I or 1080I signals are detected while “Signal Type” for INPUT 1 or IN­PUT 2 is set to “Component” or set to “Auto” and the input signal is recognized as a compo­nent signal.
To reset all adjustment items, select “Reset” and
press
.
Selectable items Standard Presentation
Cinema
Game
Description For standard image Brightens darker portions of image for more enhanced presentations. Gives greater depth to darker portions of image for a more exciting theater experience. For natural color gradation for playing a game, etc.
Selectable items
Press
\\
\\
\
Press
||
||
|
Contrast Bright Color
*1
Tint
*1
Sharp
*1
Red
*2
Blue
*2
For less contrast For less brightness For less color intensity For making skin tones purplish For less sharpness For weaker red For weaker blue
For more contrast For more brightness For more color intensity For making skin tones greenish For more sharpness For stronger red For stronger blue
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 49
-13
Introduction
Projector (Rear View)
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
Inserting the Batteries
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
Usable Range
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Switching the INPUT Mode
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Adjusting the Volume
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
To adjust the pro- jected image while viewing it
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Emphasizing the Contrast
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Adjusting the Color Temperature
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
Setting a Password
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
Changing the Password
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If You Forget Your Password
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Setting the Audio Output Type
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
Reversing/Inverting Pro- jected Images
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 50
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 51
-47
Useful Features
You can adjust the computer image, match the computer display mode, and confirm the input signal using the “Fine Sync” menu.
Computer Image Adjustment (“Fine Sync” menu)
Adjusting the Computer Image
Use the Fine Sync function in case of irregulari­ties such as vertical stripes or flickering in por­tions of the screen.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Fine Sync” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Adjustment Items
Note
You can automatically adjust the computer im­age by setting “Auto Sync” on the “Fine Sync”
menu to “ ” (ON) or pressing on the pro-
jector or
on the remote control. See next
page for details.
To reset all adjustment items, select “Reset” and
press .
Special Modes Setting
Ordinarily, the type of input signal is detected and the correct resolution mode is automatically se­lected. However, for some signals, the optimal resolution mode in “Special Modes” on the “Fine Sync” menu may need to be selected to match the computer display mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Fine Sync” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
If your computer displays patterns which repeat every other line (horizontal stripes), flickering may occur which makes the image hard to see.
See “Checking the Input Signal” on the next page for information on the currently selected input signal.
Selectable items Clock Phase
H-Pos
V-Po s
Description Adjusts vertical noise. Adjusts horizontal noise (similar to tracking on your VCR). Centers the on-screen image by moving it to the left or right. Centers the on-screen image by moving it up or down.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 52
-48
Auto Sync Adjustment
Used to automatically adjust a computer image.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Fine Sync” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Auto Sync Adjustment
Note
Auto Sync adjustment is also performed by
pressing
on the projector or on the re-
mote control.
The Auto Sync adjustment may take some time to complete, depending on the image of the computer connected to the projector.
When the optimum image cannot be achieved with Auto Sync adjustment, use manual adjust­ments. (See page 47.)
Checking the Input Signal
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Fine Sync” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
The projector will display the number of scanned lines available from audio-visual equipment such as a DVD player or Digital Video.
The projector will display the resolution when connecting the computer.
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description Auto Sync adjustment will occur when the projector is turned on or when the input signals are switched, when connected to a computer. Auto Sync adjustment is not automati­cally performed.
Computer Image Adjustment (“Fine Sync” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 53
-49
Useful Features
You can use the “Options1” menu to enhance the usage for the projector.
Checking the Lamp Life Status
You can confirm the cumulative lamp usage time and the remaining lamp life (percentage).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options1” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Lamp Timer (Life)
Note
It is recommended that the lamp be changed when the remaining lamp life becomes 5%.
The table above indicates rough estimates in the case of using only in each mode shown.
Remaining lamp life changes within the range of the values shown depending on the frequency at which “Eco Mode” is switched to “
” (Eco
mode) and “ ” (Standard mode). (See page
51.)
The lamp life may vary depending on the usage condition.
Using the “Options1” Menu
Lamp usage condition
“Life” Operated exclusively in Eco mode ( ) Operated exclusively in Standard mode ( )
Remaining lamp life
100% 5%
Approx. Approx. 3,000 hours 150 hours
Approx. Approx. 2,000 hours 100 hours
Setting the Resize Mode
Depending on the input signal, you can select the screen image.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options1” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Selectable items of Resize Modes
Normal
Border
Dot By Dot*
Stretch
*
Item when inputting RGB signal through INPUT 1 or INPUT 2
Note
For details of the Resize mode, see pages 36 and 37.
You can also press on the remote control to set the resize mode. (See page 36.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 54
-50
Setting the Video System
The video input system mode is factory preset to “Auto”; however, a clear picture from the con­nected audio-visual equipment may not be re­ceived, depending on the video signal difference. In that case, switch the video signal.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options1” screen menu for
INPUT 3 (Video) mode
Description of Video Systems
Note
The video signal can only be set in INPUT 3 or INPUT 4 mode.
When “Video System” is set to “Auto”, you may not receive a clear picture due to signal differ­ences. Should this occur, switch to video sys­tem of the source signal.
Description When connected to PAL video equipment. When connected to SECAM video equipment. When reproducing NTSC signals in PAL video equipment. When connected to NTSC video equipment.
Selectable items PA L SECAM NTSC4.43
NTSC3.58
Setting On-screen Display
This function allows you to turn the on-screen messages on or off.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options1” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of OSD Display Settings
Description
All On-screen Displays are displayed.
INPUT/VOLUME/AV MUTE/FREEZE/ AUTO SYNC/ENLARGE/ “An invalid button has been pressed.” are not displayed.
“All buttons on Projector are locked.” is displayed when the STANDBY button is pressed while the Keylock function is active.
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Using the “Options1” Menu
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 55
-51
Useful Features
Eco Mode
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options1” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Eco Mode
Note
When “Eco Mode” is set to “ ” (Eco mode), the power consumption will decrease and the
lamp life will extend. (Projection brightness de­creases 20%.)
Brightness
80%
100%
Selectable items
(Eco mode)
(Standard mode)
Power consumption
(When using AC 100V)
220 W
270 W
Lamp life
Approx. 3,000 hours
Approx. 2,000 hours
Selecting a Startup and Background Image
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options1” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Background Images
Note
* If the input signal has interference, the screen
will be displayed during interference.
Selectable items
Logo
Blue None
Description SHARP default image
Blue screen
Black screen*
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 56
-52
Auto Power Off Function
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options1” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Auto Power Off
Note
When the Auto Power Off function is set to “ (ON), 5 minutes before the projector enters the
standby mode, the message “Enter STANDBY mode in X min.” will appear on the screen to indicate the remaining minutes.
Description The projector automatically enters the standby mode when no input signal is detected for 15 minutes or longer. The Auto Power Off function will be disabled.
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Selecting the Menu Screen Position
Select “Menu Position” on the “Options1” menu and the desired position for the menu screen.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options1” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Menu Positions
Description Displayed on the center of the image. Displayed on the upper right of the image. Displayed on the lower right of the image. Displayed on the upper left of the image. Displayed on the lower left of the image.
Selectable items Center Upper Right Lower Right Upper Left Lower Left
Using the “Options1” Menu
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 57
-53
Useful Features
Note
If you input a wrong keycode, the cursor returns to the first point of the “Old Code”.
The preset keycode is 4 " buttons on the projec- tor. If this keycode is set, the keycode input screen does not appear when turning the power on.
3 Press the 4 buttons on the remote
control or on the projector to enter the new keycode in “New Code”.
Note
You cannot use the following buttons for keycode:
ON button
STANDBY button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MENU button
ZOOM/FOCUS button
ZOOM buttons
FOCUS buttons
System Lock function recognizes each but-
ton on the remote control or on the projec­tor as an individual button, even if they share the same button name. If you set the keycode with the buttons on the projector, use only those buttons on the projector. If you set the keycode with the buttons on the remote con­trol, use only those buttons on the remote control.
4 Enter the same keycode in
“Reconfirm”.
Note
Not displaying the keycode input screen when turning the projector on
Press " on the projector for four times in steps 2 and 3 above.
When the System Lock is set
When System Lock is set, the keycode input screen appears after the power is turned on. When it appears, enter the right keycode to start projection. Failure to enter the keycode will cause images not to be projected even when signals are entered to the projector.
System Lock Function
This function prevents unauthorized use of the pro­jector. Once this function is activated, users must enter the correct keycode each time the projector is turned on. We suggest you record the keycode in a safe place where only authorized users have access.
Info
If you lose or forget your keycode, contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Ser­vice Center (see page 70). Even if the product war­ranty is valid, the keycode reset will incur a charge.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options1” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
Setting the keycode
1 Select “System Lock” on the “Op-
tions1” menu, then press
.
A message is displayed.
Read this message, and press
.
2 Press the 4 buttons on the remote
control or on the projector to enter the preset keycode in “Old Code”.
When setting the keycode for the first time,
press " on the projector for four times.
""
""
" On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 58
-54
Changing the keycode
1 Press the buttons on the remote
control or on the projector to enter the preset keycode in “Old Code”.
2
Press the 4 buttons on the remote control or on the projector to enter the new keycode in “New Code”.
3 Enter the same keycode in “Recon-
firm”.
When System Lock is set
If you have set the system lock, enter the keycode and follow the procedure below to release the system lock.
Input screen for keycode
Note
When System Lock is set, the keycode input screen appears after the power is turned on.
If no keycode is entered, the image will not be displayed, even if the projector receives the in­put signal.
1 Press on the remote control or
on the projector to turn on the
projector.
2 When the keycode input screen ap-
pears, enter the right keycode to start projection.
Note
System Lock function recognizes each button on the remote control or on the projector as an individual button, even if they share the same button name. If you set the keycode with the buttons on the projector, use only those buttons on the projector. If you set the keycode with the buttons on the remote control, use only those buttons on the remote control.
Keylock Function
Use this function to lock the operation buttons on the projector.
Locking the Operation Buttons
Hold down on the projector for about 3 seconds while the projector is being turned on.
The keylock function does not affect the operation with the re­mote control buttons.
You cannot use the keylock function while the projector is warming up.
Taking the Keylock off
Hold down on the projector for about 3 seconds.
When the projector is in standby mode, you can release the keylock by holding down
on the projector for about 3 sec-
onds.
""
""
"On-screen Display
""
""
"On-screen Display
Using the “Options1” Menu
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 59
-13
Introduction
Projector (Rear View)
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
Inserting the Batteries
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
Usable Range
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
"On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press ', | or ", \ on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the
''
''
',
||
||
| or
""
""
",
\\
\\
\ buttons
on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Switching the INPUT Mode
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing
''
''
' or
""
""
" on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Adjusting the Volume
Press
\\
\\
\/
||
||
| on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or \ will lower the volume. Pressing or | will raise the volume.
"On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
"On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
To adjust the pro- jected image while viewing it
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing
''
''
' or
""
""
", the following
item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press
\\
\\
\ or
||
||
| to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Emphasizing the Contrast
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Adjusting the Color Temperature
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
Setting a Password
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press
||
||
|.
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
Changing the Password
1 Press
''
''
',
""
""
" and
||
||
| to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press
''
''
',
""
""
" and
||
||
| to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If You Forget Your Password
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Setting the Audio Output Type
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
Reversing/Inverting Pro- jected Images
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw (1) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover (2).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 60
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 61
-13
Introduction
Projector (Rear View)
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
Inserting the Batteries
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
Usable Range
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Switching the INPUT Mode
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Adjusting the Volume
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
To adjust the pro- jected image while viewing it
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Emphasizing the Contrast
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Adjusting the Color Temperature
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
Setting a Password
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
Changing the Password
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If You Forget Your Password
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Setting the Audio Output Type
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
Reversing/Inverting Pro- jected Images
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 62
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 63
-59
Useful Features
Returning to the Default Settings
This function allows you to initialize the settings you have made in the projector.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Note
The following items or menu cannot be initialized.
“Fine Sync” menu Special Modes
“Options1” menu Lamp Timer (Life) System Lock
“Language” menu
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 64
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
' " \ |
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
' " \ |
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/ \/|).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
"On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en-
larged image using ', ", \ and |.
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
'/"/\/|
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press \ or | to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press ' or " to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ",
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
" button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 65
-13
Introduction
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
Terminal for computer RGB
and component signals.
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Audio output terminal of
equipment connected to the
AUDIO INPUT terminal.
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Shared audio input terminal
for INPUT 1 and 2.
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
·
Shared computer RGB and component signals output terminal for INPUT 1 and 2.
· Terminal for connecting a monitor.
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment.
26
INPUT 4 terminal
Terminal for connecting video equipment with an S-video terminal.
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and 4.
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
Terminal for controlling the projector using a computer.
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
The speed and pitch of the cooling fan may change during operation in response to internal temperature changes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
29
AC socket
Connect the supplied Power cord.
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
Remote control sensor
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
23' (7 m)
30°
30°
30°
Front View
Rear View
30°
30°
30°
Remote control sensor
23' (7 m)
Remote control signal transmitters
Remote control
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting the computer. (See page 23.) Connecting video equipment with component output terminal (DVD player, DTV decoder, DVD recorder with hard disc, etc.). (See page 25.)
INPUT 3 terminal
Connecting video equipment without S-video output terminal. (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 1 and
2.) (See pages 23 and 25.)
INPUT 4 terminal
Connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal (VCR, DVD player, etc.). (See page 26.)
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio input terminal for INPUT 3 and
4.) (See page 26.)
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
Connecting the monitor when you want to simultaneously watch the projection image on the monitor. (See page 28.)
USB terminal
Connecting the computer using a USB cable. (See page 23.)
RS-232C terminal
Connecting the computer to control the projector. (See page 27.)
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
Connecting an audio cable. (Shared audio output terminal for INPUT 1, 2 , 3 and 4.) (See pages 28.)
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
To audio output terminal
To RGB output terminal
To USB terminal
*
ø3.5 mm stereo or mono audio cable
(commercially available or available as Sharp service part QCNWGA038WJPZ)
USB cable Connect to use the remote control as a wireless computer mouse.
To USB terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
Computer
To AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
RGB cable
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup.
Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA
DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
To audio output terminal
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
To component video output terminal
To INPUT 1 terminal
To AUDIO
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video
Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens.
As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector.
The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet.
Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth.
When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a
mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Cleaning
Paper
Mild detergent
diluted with water
Wax
Thinner
Mild detergent
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 66
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction. Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it.
Do not use the projector by holding the lens.
When storing the projector, ensure to attach
the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.)
Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected.
Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator
Red on
...
Normal (Standby)
Green on
...
Normal (Power on)
Temperature warning indicator
Off
...
Normal
Red on
...
The internal temperature is abnormally high. (See page 62.)
Lamp indicator
Green on
...
Normal
Green blinks
...
The lamp is warming up or shutting down.
Red on
...
The lamp has been shut down abnormally or
needs to be changed. (See page 62.)
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
29
STANDBY button
For putting the projector into
standby mode.
32
ZOOM buttons
For adjusting the projected
image size.
31
KEYSTONE button
For entering the Keystone
Correction mode.
L-CLICK/ENTER button
For the Left click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable. For setting items selected or adjusted on the menu.
35
FREEZE button
For freezing images.
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
For enlarging/reducing part of the
image.
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
For switching to the respective
input modes.
48
AUTO SYNC button
For automatically adjusting images
when connected to a computer.
RESIZE button
For switching the screen size (NORMAL, BORDER, etc.).
36
PICTURE MODE button
For switching the picture mode.
35
Volume buttons
For adjusting the speaker sound level.
33
AV MUTE button
For temporarily displaying the black screen and turning off the sound.
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
For the Right click when connecting the projector USB terminal to the computer with USB cable.
For undoing an operation or returning to the previous display.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
For moving the computer cursor
when connecting the projector
USB terminal to the computer
with USB cable.
For selecting menu items.
MENU button
For displaying adjustment and setting screens.
40
FOCUS buttons
For bringing the projected image into focus.
32
ON button
For turning the power on.
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
7 STANDBY
button
5 ZOOM buttons
3 ON button
5 FOCUS buttons
6 INPUT1 button
4 HEIGHT ADJUST button
3 ON button 7 STNADBY button
6 INPUT buttons 5 ZOOM/FOCUS button
5
·
6
Adjustment buttons
( / / / )
Page 19
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case. Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
R-CLICK button
L-CLICK button
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen. Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection. If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input. When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com- mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To S-video output terminal
S-video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 4 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
To audio output terminal
To video output terminal
Composite video cable (commercially available)
To INPUT 3 terminal
To AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
Video Equipment
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps). When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector. Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector. When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to 1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size ( 1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed. When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change. When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37. To return to the standard image, press while
RESIZE” is displayed on the screen. This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 600)
XGA (1024 768)
SXGA (1280 960)
SXGA+ (1400 1050)
SXGA (1280 1024)
1280 720
1024 768
960 768
800 600
1280 960
1400 1050
1280 1024
768 576
720 576
1024 576
960 576
1024 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON). You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON). For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen. When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF). You can make corrections manually when you
want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings. Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator Lamp indicator Temperature warning indicator
Maintenance Indicators
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector.
If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and
the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49.
Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking.
When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally.
Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury. Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you
may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 67
-13
Introduction
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 68
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it.
Do not use the projector by holding the lens.
When storing the projector, ensure to attach
the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.)
Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected.
Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector.
If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and
the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49.
Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking.
When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally.
Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn
or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool
before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you
may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 69
-13
Introduction
Projector (Rear View)
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
Inserting the Batteries
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
Usable Range
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
"On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Correcting Trapezoidal Distortion
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press ', | or ", \ on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the
''
''
',
||
||
| or
""
""
",
\\
\\
\ buttons
on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Switching the INPUT Mode
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing
''
''
' or
""
""
" on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Adjusting the Volume
Press
\\
\\
\/
||
||
| on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or \ will lower the volume. Pressing or | will raise the volume.
"On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
"On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
To adjust the pro- jected image while viewing it
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing
''
''
' or
""
""
", the following
item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press
\\
\\
\ or
||
||
| to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Emphasizing the Contrast
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Adjusting the Color Temperature
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
Setting a Password
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press
''
''
' or
""
""
" to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press
||
||
|.
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
Changing the Password
1 Press
''
''
',
""
""
" and
||
||
| to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press
''
''
',
""
""
" and
||
||
| to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If You Forget Your Password
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Setting the Audio Output Type
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
Reversing/Inverting Pro- jected Images
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Removing and Installing the Lamp Unit
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw (1) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover (2).
1
2
User service screw (for lamp unit cover)
Tab
Tab
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 70
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction.
Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
About the Indicators on the Projector
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
Remote Control
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
' " \ |
Page 19
1. Place the projector facing a screen
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
Setup and Projection
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
2. Connect the projector to the computer and plug the power
cord into the AC socket of the projector
3. Remove the lens cap and turn the projector on
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
How to Use the Storage Case
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case.
Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
Using the Remote Control as the Wireless Computer Mouse
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
' " \ |
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/ \/|).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen.
Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection.
If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
Using the Adjustment Feet
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps).
When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector.
Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector.
When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
"On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Displaying the Black Screen and Turning off
the Sound Temporarily
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Displaying an Enlarged Portion of an Image
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en-
larged image using ', ", \ and |.
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to ×1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size (×1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed.
When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change.
When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Resize Mode
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37.
To return to the standard image, press while RESIZE” is displayed on the screen.
This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 × 600)
XGA (1024 × 768)
SXGA (1280 × 960)
SXGA+ (1400 × 1050)
SXGA (1280 × 1024)
1280 × 720
1024 × 768
960 × 768
800 × 600
1280 × 960
1400 × 1050
1280 × 1024
768 × 576
720 × 576
1024 × 576
960 × 576
1024 × 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
'/"/\/|
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
sRGB Setting
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON).
For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
Signal Type Setting
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Auto Keystone Setting
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen.
When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF).
You can make corrections manually when you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Speaker Setting
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the Transmis- sion Speed (RS-232C)
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings.
Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
Monitor Output Settings
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Selecting the On-screen Display Language
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press \ or | to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press ' or " to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ('/"/\/|)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Lamp
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
Caution Concerning the Lamp
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Replacing the Lamp
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Resetting the Lamp Timer
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ",
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
User service screw (for lamp unit cover)
AC socket
ON button
" button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 71
-67
Appendix
Note
This projector may not be able to display images from notebook computers in simultaneous (CRT/LCD) mode. Should this occur, turn off the LCD display on the notebook computer and output the display data in “CRT only” mode. Details on how to change display modes can be found in your notebook computer’s operation manual.
When this projector receives 640 × 350 VESA format VGA signals, “640 × 400” appears on the screen.
When projecting the RGB interlace signal using INPUT 1/2 with “Signal Type” set to “Auto” or “RGB”, the
image may not be projected as desired. In this case, select either INPUT 3 (Video) or INPUT 4 (S-Video).
Computer Compatibility Chart
Multiple signal support Horizontal Frequency: 15–70 kHz Vertical Frequency: 43–85 Hz Pixel Clock: 12–108 MHz Sync signal: Compatible with TTL level
DTV
Computer
27.0
31.5
37.5
27.0
31.5
37.9
27.0
31.5
27.0
31.5
37.9
26.2
31.5
34.7
37.9
37.5
43.3
31.4
35.1
37.9
46.6
48.1
46.9
53.7
35.5
40.3
48.4
56.5
60.0
68.7
55.0
66.2
67.5
64.0
64.0
34.9
37.8
49.7
60.2
68.7
60 70 85 60 70 85 60 70 60 70 85 50 60 70 72 75 85 50 56 60 70 72 75 85 43 50 60 70 75 85 60 70 75 60 60 67 60 75 75 75
Upscale
True
True
Intelligent Compression
Upscale
Intelligent Compression
640 × 350
640 × 400
720 × 350
720 × 400
640 × 480
800 × 600
1,024 × 768
1,152 × 864
1,280 × 1,024 1,400 × 1,050
640 × 480 800 × 600
832 × 624 1,024 × 768 1,152 × 870
MAC 13"
MAC 16"
MAC 19" MAC 21"
PC
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA
SXGA+
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA
✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Display
PC/MAC/WS Resolution VESA Standard
Vertical Frequency
(Hz)
Horizontal Frequency
(kHz)
15.7
31.5
33.8
15.6
31.3
45.0
28.1
33.8
28.1
33.8
480
I
480P 540P 576
I
576P 720P
1035
I
1035
I
1080
I
1080
I
60 60 60 50 50 60 50 60 50 60
Signal Vertical Frequency (Hz)Horizontal Frequency (kHz)
Compatible with sync on green signal
SXGA+ and SXGA compatible in intelligent com-
pression
Intelligent Compression and Expansion System resizing technology
The following is a list of modes that conform to VESA. However, this projector supports other signals that are not VESA standards.
The table below lists signal codes that are compatible with the projector. When the images are distorted or cannot be projected, adjust the output signal of your computer and so forth while referring to the table below.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 72
-68
Troub leshooting
Check
Projector power cord is not plugged into the wall outlet.
Power to the external connected devices is off.
The selected input mode is wrong.
The AV MUTE function is working.
Cables incorrectly connected to rear panel of the projector.
Remote control batteries have run out.
External output has not been set when connecting notebook computer.
The lamp unit cover is not installed correctly.
Cables incorrectly connected to the rear panel of the projector.
“Bright” is set to minimum position.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
(Video Input only)
Video input system is incorrectly set. (INPUT 1, INPUT 2 only)
Input signal type (RGB/Component) is incorrectly set.
Adjust the focus.
The projection distance exceeds the focus range.
(Computer Input only)
Perform “Fine Sync” Adjustments. (“Clock” Adjustment)
Perform “Fine Sync” Adjustments. (“Phase” Adjustment)
Noise may appear depending on the computer.
Cables incorrectly connected to rear panel of the projector.
Volume is set to minimum.
If the picture is normal, the sound is due to cabinet shrinkage
caused by room temperature changes. This will not affect operation or performance.
See “Maintenance Indicators”.
The keylock is set.
If the keylock is set to ON, all the buttons are locked.
Problem
An unusual sound is
occasionally heard
from the cabinet.
Maintenance
indicator illuminates or
blinks in red.
The projector cannot be turned on or put into the standby mode using the
ON or STANDBY button
on the projector.
Page
29
33 34
23,25-28
15 67
65,66
23,25-28
44
44
50
46
32 19
47 47
23,25-28
33
62
54
Sound is heard but no
picture appears.
Color is faded or poor.
Picture is blurred;
noise appears.
Picture appears but no
sound is heard.
No picture and no sound
or projector does not start.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 73
-13
Introduction
Using the Kensington Lock
This projector has a Kensington Security Standard connector for use with a Kensington MicroSaver Security System. Refer to the information that came with the system for instructions on how to use it to secure the projector.
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
INPUT 1 terminal
30
Rear adjustment feet
61
Intake vent
INPUT 2 terminal
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
23·25
23·25
23·25
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
28
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
26
INPUT 3 terminal
26
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
23
USB terminal
27
RS-232C terminal
15
Remote control sensor
61
Exhaust vent
29
AC socket
13
Kensington Security Standard connector
Terminals Refer to “INPUT/OUTPUT Terminals and Connectable Main Equipment” on
page 21.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Introduction
Using the Remote Control
The batteries (two R-03 batteries (“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4, HP-16 or similar)) are sup- plied in the package.
1
Press the mark on the cover and slide it in the direction of the arrow.
2 Insert the batteries.
Insert the batteries making sure the po- larities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compartment.
3 Attach the cover and slide it un-
til it clicks into place.
Incorrect use of the batteries may cause them to leak or explode. Please follow the precautions below.
Caution
Insert the batteries making sure the polarities correctly match the and marks inside the battery compart- ment.
Batteries of different types have different properties, therefore do not mix batteries of different types.
Do not mix new and old batteries.
This may shorten the life of new batteries or may cause old batteries to leak.
Remove the batteries from the remote control once they have run out, as leaving them in can cause them to leak. Battery fluid from leaked batteries is harmful to skin, therefore ensure to first wipe them and then remove them using a cloth.
The batteries included with this projector may run down in a short period, depending on how they are kept. Ensure to replace them as soon as possible with new batteries.
Remove the batteries from the remote control if you will not be using the remote control for a long time.
The remote control can be used to control the projector within the ranges shown in the illustration.
Note
The signal from the remote control can be reflected off a screen for easy operation. However, the effective distance of the sig- nal may differ depending on the screen material.
When using the remote control:
Ensure not to drop, expose to moisture or high temperature.
The remote control may malfunction under a fluorescent lamp. In this case, move the pro- jector away from the fluorescent lamp.
°
°
°
Front View
Rear View
°
°
°
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23
25
INPUT 3 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 terminal
23 25
INPUT 4 terminal
26
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 terminal
26
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal
28
USB terminal
23
RS-232C terminal
27
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal
28
Connections
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
Before connecting, ensure the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet is unplugged,
and that the devices to be connected are turned off. After making all connections, turn on the
projector and then the other devices. When connecting a computer, ensure that it is the last
device to be turned on after all the connections are made.
Ensure the operation manuals of the devices to be connected have been read before making connections.
*
When using the ø3.5 mm mono audio cable, the volume level will be half of when using the ø3.5 mm stereo audio cable.
Note
When connecting with a USB cable, you can use the remote control as a mouse for controlling the cursor. See page 24.
See page 67 “Computer Compatibility Chart” for a list of computer signals compatible with the projector. Use with computer signals other than those listed may cause some of the functions to not work.
A Macintosh adaptor may be required for use with some Macintosh computers. Contact your nearest Macintosh Dealer.
Depending on the computer you are using, an image may not be projected unless the signal output setting of the computer is switched to the external output. Refer to the computer operation
manual for switching the computer signal output settings.
“Plug and Play” function (when connecting to a 15-pin terminal)
This projector is compatible with VESA-standard DDC 1/DDC 2B. The projector and a VESA DDC com- patible computer will communicate their setting requirements, allowing for quick and easy setup. Before using the “Plug and Play” function, ensure to turn on the projector first and the connected
computer last.
Note
The DDC “Plug and Play” function of this projector operates only when used in conjunction with a VESA DDC compatible computer.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Connecting to Video Equipment
The projector has a COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal, an S-VIDEO terminal and VIDEO terminal for video input. Refer to the listed illustrations on how to connect audio-visual equipment. The image quality is highest in order of the component signal, the RGB signal, the S-video signal and the video signal. If your audio-visual equipment has a component output terminal or RGB output terminal, use the COMPUTER-RGB/COMPONENT terminal (INPUT 1 or INPUT 2) on the projector for video connection.
When connecting video equipment with component video output terminal
(When connecting to INPUT 1)
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input.
When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com-
mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connections
Controlling the Projector by a Computer
When the RS-232C terminal on the projector is connected to a computer with a DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS) and an RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available), the computer can be used to control the projector and check the status of the projector. Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for details.
When connecting to a computer using an RS-232C serial control cable and a DIN-D-sub RS- 232C adaptor
Note
The RS-232C function may not operate if your computer terminal is not correctly set up. Refer to the operation manual of the computer for details.
Refer to page 4 of the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for “RS-232C Specifica- tions and Commands”.
Info
Do not connect the RS-232C cable to a port other than the RS-232C terminal on the computer. This may damage your computer or projector.
Do not connect or disconnect an RS-232C serial control cable to or from the computer while it is on. This may damage your computer.
Computer
To RS-232C terminal
RS-232C serial control cable (cross type, commercially available)
To RS-232C terminal
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor (optional: AN-A1RS)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
On-screen Display (Keystone Correction mode)
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
UNDO button
KEYSTONE button
Compresses lower side.
Compresses upper side.
Note
The Manual Keystone Correction can be ad- justed up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees and the screen can also be set up to an angle of approximately ±35 degrees (when the resize mode is set to “NORMAL” (see page 36)). The screen can also be installed by inclin- ing to that angle.
The Keystone Correction cannot be ad- justed in the lateral direction.
You can use the same settings used in NORMAL mode 4:3 for 16:9.
Auto Keystone Correction
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. The function for correcting trapezoidal distortion is called Keystone Correction. This projector is equipped with an “Auto Keystone Correction” function that automatically corrects any trapezoidal distortion within the projected im- age. The correction is made automatically provided the vertical incline or decline is within 12 degrees.
Note
When not using the Auto Keystone Correc- tion function, set “Auto Keystone” on the “Options2” menu to “
” (OFF).
Manual Keystone Correction
When you want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been activated, or when you want to make corrections without using the Auto Keystone Correction function, you can make corrections manually using the following procedure.
1
Press
on the remote control to
enter the Keystone Correction mode.
You can also use on the projector.
2 Press , or , on the re-
mote control to adjust the Key- stone Correction.
You can also adjust the Keystone Cor- rection using the , or , buttons on the projector.
Note
Press to return to the default setting.
Straight lines or the edges of images may appear jagged while adjusting the image.
3 Press .
The on-screen display of the Keystone Correction mode will disappear.
You can also use
on the
projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
Select the appropriate input mode for the con- nected equipment.
Press , , or on the re- mote control to select the input mode.
When pressing or on the projector, input
mode switches in order of :
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4
Note
When no signal is received, “NO SIGNAL” will be displayed. When a signal that the projector is not preset to receive is received, “NOT REG.” will be displayed.
The INPUT mode is not displayed when “OSD Display” of the “Options1” menu is set to “
” (OFF). (See page 50.)
About the INPUT mode
Press / on the projector or VOL
/ on the remote control to ad-
just the volume.
Note
Pressing or will lower the volume. Pressing or will raise the volume.
On-screen Display of INPUT Mode (Example)
Using RGB
Using Component
INPUT 1/2 mode
INPUT 4 mode
Using S-Video
INPUT 3 mode
Using Video Used for projecting images from equipment that sends RGB sig- nals or component signals con- nected to the RGB input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the VIDEO input terminal.
Used for projecting images from equipment connected to the S-VIDEO input terminal.
INPUT 1/ INPUT 2 (RGB/ Component)
INPUT 3 (Video)
INPUT 4 (S-Video)
INPUT buttons
/ / /
Volume buttons
On-screen Display
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Basic Operation
VIDEO
“STRETCH” is fixed when 540P, 720P or 1080 signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
3Press or to select the item
you want to adjust.
The selected item is highlighted.
Press .
The selected single adjustment item (e.g. “Bright”) appears instead of the menu.
When pressing or , the following item (“Red” after “Bright”) will be dis- played.
Note
Press to return to the previous screen.
4 Press or to adjust the item
selected.
The adjustment is stored.
5 Press .
The menu screen will disappear.
Single adjustment items
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function emphasizes the bright portions of images to obtain a higher contrast image.
Menu operation Page 40
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Bright Boost Setting
Note
“Bright Boost” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Color Temperature Settings
Note
Values on “CLR Temp” are only for general stan- dard purposes.
“CLR Temp” cannot be set when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON).
Selectable items 5500K 6500K 7500K 8500K 9300K 10500K
Description For lower color temperature for warmer, reddish incandescent-like images.
For higher color temperature for cooler, bluish, fluorescent-like images.
Description
To improve color reproduction, lower bright boost setting.
To increase brightness, increase bright boost setting.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
Helpful Functions Set during Installation Options2Ó menu)
There is no factory preset for the password, so
the “Options2” menu is enabled.
If you do not want others to operate the “Op-
tions2” menu, set a password.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
1 Select “Password” from the “Op-
tions2” menu, and press
.
The screen for entering the password is displayed.
2 Press or to set the first digit in
“New Password” and then press .
3 Enter the remaining 3 digits and
press
.
4 Enter the same password in “Re-
confirm” and press
.
Note
The password must be entered to use the “Op- tions2” menu when a password has been set.
1 Press , and to enter the
password in “Old Password” and
press
.
2 Press , and to set the new
password in “New Password” and
press
.
3 Enter the same 4-digit password in
“Reconfirm” and press
.
Note
If you do not want to set a password, leave the
fields blank in steps 2 and 3 and press .
To cancel the password settings, press .
If you forget the password, delete it using the fol- lowing procedure and set a new password.
Note
If is held down for more than 3 seconds, the op-
eration buttons on the projector will be locked. (See page 54.)
You can only use the buttons on the projector to de- lete the password.
Press
.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Useful Features
This function determines whether the audio level output from the AUDIO OUTPUT terminal is fixed or variable by linking with VOLUME.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Audio Out Settings
Info
When “Audio Out” has been set to “VAO”, first make sure to lower the volume of the projector before turning the power on or off and when switching the input.
Description Audio output that does not vary in strength with the volume level of the source projector. Audio output that varies in strength with the volume level of the source projector.
Selectable items FAO (Fixed Audio Output) VAO (Variable Audio Output)
This projector is equipped with a reverse/invert image function that allows you to reverse or in- vert the projected image for various applications.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of PRJ Modes
Note
This function is used for the reversed image and ceiling-mount setups. (See page 20.)
Description Normal image
Inverted image
Reversed image
Reversed and inverted image
Selectable items
Front
Ceiling + Front
Rear
Ceiling + Rear
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Cleaning the lens
Use a commercially available blower or lens clean- ing paper (for glasses and camera lenses) for clean- ing the lens. Do not use any liquid type cleaning agents, as they may wear off the coating film on the surface of the lens. As the surface of the lens can easily get damaged, ensure not to scrape or hit the lens.
Cleaning the exhaust and intake vents
Use a vacuum cleaner to clean dust from the ex- haust vent and the intake vent.
Info
If you want to clean the air vents during projec- tor operation, ensure to press
on the pro- jector or on the remote control and put the projector into standby mode. After the cooling fan has stopped, unplug the power cord from the AC socket and clean the vents.
Cleaning the projector
Ensure the power cord is unplugged before cleaning the projector. The cabinet as well as the operation panel is made of plastic. Avoid using benzene or thinner, as these can damage the finish on the cabinet. Do not use volatile agents such as insecticides on the projector. Do not attach rubber or plastic items to the projec- tor for long periods. The effects of some of the agents in the plastic may cause damage to the quality or finish of the projector.
Wipe off dirt gently with a soft flannel cloth. When the dirt is hard to remove, soak a cloth in a mild detergent diluted with water, wring the cloth well and then wipe the projector. Strong cleaning detergents may discolor, warp or damage the coating on the projector. Make sure to test on a small, inconspicuous area on the projec- tor before use.
Maintenance
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Maintenance indicator
Problem
Cause Possible solution
Temperature
warning
indicator
Normal
Abnormal
Off
Red on (Standby)
The internal temperature is abnormally high.
Abnormal
Blocked air intake
Relocate the projector to an area
with proper ventilation (see page
7).
Cooling fan break- down
Internal circuit failure
Clogged air intake
Take the projector to your nearest
Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Clean the exhaust and intake vents. (See page 61.)
Lamp
indicator
Red on (Standby)
The lamp does not illuminate.
Burnt-out lamp
Lamp circuit failure
Carefully replace the lamp. (See
page 65.)
Take the projector to your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center (see page 70) for repair.
Please exercise care when replacing the lamp.
Red on
Time to change the lamp.
Remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less.
Green on
Green blinks
when the lamp
is warming up
or shutting
down.
Info
If the temperature warning indicator illuminates and the projector enters the standby mode, check whether any of the ventilation holes are blocked (see page 7) and then try turning the power back on. Wait until the projector has cooled down completely before plugging in the power cord and turning the power back on. (At least 10 minutes.)
If the power is turned off for a brief moment due to power outage or some other cause while using the projector, and the power supply recovers immediately after that, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red and the lamp may not be lit. In this case, unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, replace the power cord in the AC outlet and then turn the power on again.
Do not unplug the power cord after the projector has entered the standby mode and while the cooling fan is running. The cooling fan runs for about 90 seconds.
The lamp does not illuminate.
The lamp is shut down abnormally.
Disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet, and then connect it again.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
Optional
accessory
Lamp unit AN-MB60LP
Info
Ensure the lamp unit is removed using the handle. Ensure the glass surface of the lamp unit or the inside of the projector are not touched.
To avoid injury to yourself and damage to the lamp, ensure to carefully follow the steps below.
Do not loosen other screws except for the lamp unit cover and lamp unit.
1 Press on the projector or
on the remote control to put
the projector into standby mode.
Wait until the cooling fan stops.
Warning!
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp and parts around the lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury.
2 Disconnect the power cord.
Unplug the power cord from the AC socket.
Leave the lamp until it has fully cooled down (about 1 hour).
3 Remove the lamp unit cover.
Turn the projector over. Loosen the user service screw ( ) that secures the lamp unit cover. Pressing the tab, remove the lamp unit cover ( ).
AC socket
STANDBY button
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Appendix
CheckProblem Page
Picture is green on INPUT 1 (COMPONENT)/ INPUT 2 (COMPONENT).
Picture is pink (no green)
on INPUT 1 (RGB)/
INPUT 2 (RGB).
Picture is too bright and
whitish.
The cooling fan
becomes noisy.
The lamp does not light
up even after the
projector turns on.
The lamp suddenly turns
off during projection.
The image sometimes
flickers.
The lamp takes a long
time to turn on. Picture is dark.
Change the input signal type setting.
Image adjustments are incorrectly set.
When temperature inside the projector increases, the cooling
fan runs faster.
The lamp indicator is illuminating in red. Replace the lamp.
Cables incorrectly connected to the projector or the connected equipment works improperly.
If this happens frequently, replace the lamp.
The lamp will eventually need to be changed.
The lamp has reached the end of its life. Replace the lamp.
46
44
62
23,25-28
65 65
This projector is equipped with a microprocessor. Its performance could be adversely affected by incorrect operation or interference. If this should happen, unplug the projector and plug it in again after more than 5 minutes.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 74
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction. Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case. Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen. Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection. If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input. When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com- mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps). When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector. Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector. When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to 1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size ( 1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed. When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change. When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37. To return to the standard image, press while
RESIZE” is displayed on the screen. This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 600)
XGA (1024 768)
SXGA (1280 960)
SXGA+ (1400 1050)
SXGA (1280 1024)
1280 720
1024 768
960 768
800 600
1280 960
1400 1050
1280 1024
768 576
720 576
1024 576
960 576
1024 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON). You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON). For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen. When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF). You can make corrections manually when you
want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings. Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury. Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 75
-71
Appendix
Specifications
Multimedia Projector PG-MB60X NTSC3.58/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL-60/SECAM/ DTV480I/DTV480P/DTV540P/DTV576I/DTV576P/DTV720P/DTV1035I/DTV1080I Single Chip Digital Micromirror Device
TM
(DMDTM) by Texas Instruments Panel size: 0.7" No. of dots: 786,432 dots (1,024 [H] × 768 [V])
1.5 × electric zoom/focus lens, F2.0–2.5, f = 21.3–31.6 mm 200 W DC lamp 15-pin mini D-sub connector Y: 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative, 75 terminated P
B
: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 terminated PR: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 terminated 750 TV lines (DTV720P) 15-pin mini D-sub connector RGB separate/sync on green type analog input: 0–0.7 Vp-p, positive, 75 terminated HORIZONTAL SYNC. SIGNAL: TTL level (positive/negative) VERTICAL SYNC. SIGNAL: Same as above RCA connector: VIDEO, composite video, 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative, 75 terminated 4-pin mini DIN connector Y (luminance signal): 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative, 75 terminated C (chrominance signal): Burst 0.286 Vp-p, 75 terminated ø3.5 mm minijack: AUDIO, 0.5 Vrms, more than 22 k (stereo) 4-pin B-type USB female connector 9-pin mini DIN connector 12–108 MHz 43–85 Hz 15–70 kHz
2.0 W (monaural)
4.0 cm × 2.85 cm oval × 1 AC 100–240 V
2.7 A 50/60 Hz 270 W (Standard mode)/220 W (Eco mode) with AC 100 V 255 W (Standard mode)/210 W (Eco mode) with AC 240 V 5 W (AC 100 V) – 6 W (AC 240 V) 1,015 BTU/hour (Standard mode)/960 BTU/hour (Eco mode) with AC 100 V 960 BTU/hour (Standard mode)/760 BTU/hour (Eco mode) with AC 240 V 41°F to 104°F (+5°C to +40°C) –4°F to 140°F (–20°C to +60°C) Plastic 38 kHz 12 7/32" × 3 33/64" × 11 7/64" (310 (W) × 89 (H) × 282 (D) mm) (main body only) 12 7/32
" × 4 7/64" × 11 5/16" (310 (W) × 104 (H) × 287 (D) mm) (including adjustment foot
and projecting parts)
8.8 lbs. (4.0 kg) Lamp unit (Lamp/cage module) (AN-MB60LP), Remote control (RRMCGA342WJSA), Power cord for U.S., Canada, etc. (QACCDA010WJPZ), Power cord for Europe, except U.K. (QACCVA011WJPZ), Power cord for U.K., Hong Kong and Singapore (QACCBA036WJPZ), Power cord for Australia, New Zealand and Oceania (QACCLA018WJPZ), RGB cable (QCNWGA045WJPZ), USB cable (QCNWGA014WJPZ), Storage case (GCASNA014WJSA), Lens cap (RCAPHA021WJSA), Projector manual and technical reference CD-ROM (UDSKAA053WJZZ), “QUICK GUIDE” label (TLABZA793WJZZ), Operation manual (TINS­B526WJZZ)
Product type
Model
Video system
Display method
DMD panel
Lens
Projection lamp
Component input (INPUT 1/2)/
output (OUTPUT) signal
Horizontal resolution
Computer RGB input (INPUT 1/2)/
output (OUTPUT) signal
Video input signal
(INPUT 3)
S-video input signal
(INPUT 4)
Audio input signal
USB terminal
RS-232C terminal
Pixel clock
Vertical frequency
Horizontal frequency
Audio output
Speaker system
Rated voltage
Input current
Rated frequency
Power consumption
Power consumption (standby)
Heat dissipation
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Cabinet
I/R carrier frequency
Dimensions (approx.)
Weight (approx.)
Replacement parts
As a part of policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are nominal values of production units. There may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 76
-6
1. Read Instructions
2. Retain Instructions
3. Heed Warnings
4. Follow Instructions
5. Cleaning
6. Attachments
7. Water and Moisture
8. Accessories
9. Transportation
10. Ventilation
11. Power Sources
12. Grounding or Polarization
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. Power-Cord Protection
14. Lightning
15. Overloading
16. Object and Liquid Entry
17. Servicing
18. Damage Requiring Service
19. Replacement Parts
20. Safety Check
21.Wall or Ceiling Mounting
22. Heat
CAUTION: Please read all of these instructions before you operate this product and save these
instructions for later use.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Info
The cooling fan regulates the internal tem- perature, and its performance is automati- cally controlled. The sound of the fan may change during projector operation due to changes in the fan speed. This does not indicate malfunction. Do not unplug the power cord during pro- jection or cooling fan operation. This can cause damage due to rise in internal tem- perature, as the cooling fan also stops.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Caution regarding usage of the projector
When using the projector, ensure not to sub- ject it to hard impact and/or vibration, as this can result in damage. Take extra care with the lens. If you are not to use the projector for a long time, ensure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and disconnect any other cables connected to it. Do not use the projector by holding the lens. When storing the projector, ensure to attach the lens cap to the projector. (See page 11.) Do not expose the storage case or projector to direct sunlight or near heat sources. The storage case or projector may change color or become deformed.
Other connected equipment
When connecting a computer or other audio- visual equipment to the projector, make the connections AFTER unplugging the power cord of the projector from the AC outlet and turning off the equipment to be connected. Please read the operation manuals of the pro- jector and the equipment to be connected for instructions on how to make the connections.
Using the projector in other countries
The power supply voltage and the shape of the plug may vary depending on the region or country you are using the projector in. When using the projector overseas, ensure to use an appropriate power cord for the coun- try you are in.
Temperature monitor function
If the projector starts to over- heat due to setup problems or blockage of the air vents, ” and “ will illumi- nate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature continues to rise, the lamp will turn off, the temperature warning indicator on the projector will blink, and after a 90-second cool- ing-off period the projector will enter the standby mode. Refer to “Maintenance Indicators” on page 62 for details.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Power indicator
Temperature warning indicator
62
Lamp indicator
62
When Attaching the “QUICK GUIDE” Label
“QUICK GUIDE”
Label
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Note
All the buttons on the remote control, except the MOUSE/Adjustment button, are made of luminous material that is visible in the dark. Visibility will diminish over time. Exposure to light will recharge the luminous buttons.
29
STANDBY button
32
ZOOM buttons
31
KEYSTONE button
L-CLICK/ENTER button
35
FREEZE button
34
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce)
buttons
33
INPUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons
48
AUTO SYNC button
RESIZE button
36
PICTURE MODE button
35
Volume buttons
33
AV MUTE button
34
R-CLICK/UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
MENU button
40
FOCUS buttons
32
ON button
29
24·40
24·40
24·40
Numbers in refer to the main pages in this operation manual where the topic is explained.
Part Names and Functions
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Quick Start
·
Page 19
Pages 23, 29
Page 29
On the remote controlOn the projector
This section shows the basic operation (projector connecting with the computer). For details, see the page described below for each step.
In this section, connection of the projector and the computer is explained using one example.
When connecting equipment other than the computer, see pages 25 and 26.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Storing the Projector
Lens cap
Fixing band
Info
Info
When storing the projector, attach the lens cap to the lens, and place it in the supplied storage case.
1 Open the cover of the storage
case.
2 Place the projector into the stor-
age case.
Ensure the projector has cooled down sufficiently before placing it in the case. Ensure the lens cap is attached to the lens for protection.
Place the projector into the storage case with the lens facing the handle.
Ensure the projector is held in place by using the fixing band.
3 Close the cover of the storage
case.
4 Place the accessories in the front
pocket of the storage case.
This storage case is only for storing the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Terminal on the
projector
INPUT 1, 2 AUDIO INPUT INPUT 1, 2 INPUT 1, 2
INPUT3 INPUT4
AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO OUTPUT OUTPUT
Equipment
Computer Audio-visual
equipment
Amplifier Monitor
Terminal on
connected equipment
RGB
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Component
video
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Video
output terminal
S-video
output terminal
Audio
output terminal
Terminal
for using
the
dedicated
cable
Audio
input terminal
RGB input
terminal
Cable
RGB cable (supplied) ¿3.5 mm stereo audio cable (commercially available) 3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP) Connect with the cable adaptor, etc.
Video cable (commercially available) S-video cable (commercially available)
¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
Connect with the cable adaptor, etc. ¿3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable
(commercially available)
RGB cable (commercially available)
Samples of Cables for Connection
For more details of connection and cables, refer to the operation manual of the connecting equipment.
You may need other cables or connectors not listed below.
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
Cable adaptor (commercially available)
3 RCA (Component) to 15-pin D-sub cable (optional: AN-C3CP)
Dedicated cable
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available)
Dedicated cable
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Connecting to a Computer
When connecting the projector and the computer with the supplied RGB cable and USB cable (see page 23), you can use the remote control as the computer mouse.
The mouse pointer can be operated in the following way after it is connected.
When moving the cursor
Press MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / /
/ ).
When left-clicking
Press
.
When right-clicking
Press .
When your computer supports only a one-click mouse (such as Macintosh)
Press
or .
L-CLICK and R-CLICK have common func-
tion.
Note
You cannot use this function when displaying the menu screen. Confirm that the computer recognizes the USB connection. If “Resize” is displayed when signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input and you have set “Dot By Dot” as the screen size, you cannot operate the mouse function.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When connecting video equipment with video output terminal
When connecting video equipment with S-video output terminal
Note
ø3.5 mm minijack to RCA audio cable (commercially available) is required for audio input. When you connect video equipment with a 21-pin RGB output (Euro-scart) to the projector, use a com- mercially available cable that fits in the projector terminal you want to connect.
Connecting to Video Equipment
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Rear adjustment feet
Image Projection
Front adjustment
foot
HEIGHT ADJUST button
The height of the projector can be adjusted using the adjustment feet at the front and rear of the projector when the screen is located higher than the projector, the screen is inclined or when the installation site is slightly inclined. Install the projector so that it is as perpen- dicular to the screen as possible.
1
Press the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The front adjustment foot comes out.
2 Lift the projector to adjust its
height while pressing the HEIGHT ADJUST button.
The projector is adjustable up to approxi- mately 12 degrees (6 steps). When lowering the projector, it may be difficult to move the front adjustment foot because the installation surface is diffi- cult to slide. In this case, pull the pro- jector back slightly and adjust its height.
3 Remove your hand from the
HEIGHT ADJUST button of the projector after its height has been finely adjusted.
4 Finely adjust the height and in-
clination by turning the rear ad- justment feet.
When adjusting the height of the pro- jector, trapezoidal distortion occurs. When “Auto Keystone” of the “Options2” menu is set to “
” (ON) (see page 56), keystone correction functions automati- cally to correct trapezoidal distortion. When you want to adjust the automati- cally corrected image, use the manual keystone correction. (See page 31.)
Info
Do not press the HEIGHT ADJUST button when the front adjustment foot comes out without firmly holding the projector. Do not hold the lens when lifting or lower- ing the projector. When lowering the projector, be careful not to get your fingers caught in the area be- tween the adjustment foot and the projector.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
1 4 9 16 36 642 3
Image Projection
AV MUTE button
On-screen Display
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
ENLARGE (Enlarge/Reduce) buttons
UNDO button
RESIZE button
Press on the remote control to temporarily display a black screen and turn off the sound.
Note
Pressing again will turn the projected image and sound back on.
Graphs, tables and other portions of projected images can be enlarged. This is helpful when providing more detailed explanations.
1 Press on the remote control.
Enlarges the image.
Pressing
or enlarges or reduces
the projected image.
Note
You can change the location of the en- larged image using , , and .
2 Press on the remote control
to cancel the operation.
The magnification then returns to 1.
Note
In the following cases, the image will return to the normal size ( 1).
When switching the INPUT mode.
When
has been pressed.
When the input signal is changed. When the input signal resolution and re- fresh rate (vertical frequency) change. When has been pressed.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Press on the remote control.
Pressing changes the display as shown on
pages 36 and 37. To return to the standard image, press while
RESIZE” is displayed on the screen. This function can also be accessed from the OSD menu (see page 49).
This function allows you to modify or customize the resize mode to enhance the input image. Depend- ing on the input signal, you can choose “NORMAL”, “DOT BY DOT”, “BORDER” or “STRETCH” image.
COMPUTER
4:3 aspect ratio
Other aspect ratios
SVGA (800 600)
XGA (1024 768)
SXGA (1280 960)
SXGA+ (1400 1050)
SXGA (1280 1024)
1280 720
1024 768
960 768
800 600
1280 960
1400 1050
1280 1024
768 576
720 576
1024 576
960 576
1024 576
NORMAL DOT BY DOT BORDER STRETCH
RESIZE button
UNDO button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Image Projection
Note
If “RESIZE” is displayed when you have set “DOT BY DOT” and signals having a higher resolution than XGA are being input, you can move the image so that it appears entirely within the panel by using the adjustment buttons (
/ / /
) on the remote control. (However, this does not apply when you have set “Resize” from the OSD menu.)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Picture Adjustment (ÒPictureÓ menu)
When you want to display the image in a natural tint based on an original image from the com- puter, select “sRGB” and set it to “
” (ON).
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Note
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “
” (ON). You cannot set the items, “Red”, “Blue”, “CLR Temp”, “Bright Boost” on the “Picture” menu, when “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON). For additional information about the sRGB func- tion, visit “http://www.srgb.com/”.
Info
When “sRGB” is set to “ ” (ON), the projected image may become dark, but this does not indi- cate a malfunction.
This function allows you to select the input sig- nal type RGB or Component for INPUT 1 or IN- PUT 2.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Picture” screen menu for IN-
PUT 1 (RGB) mode
Description of Signal Type Settings
Description Input signals are automatically recog- nized as RGB or Component. Set when RGB signals are received. Set when Component signals are received.
Selectable items
Auto
RGB Component
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
When the image is projected either from the top or from the bottom towards the screen at an angle, the image becomes distorted trapezoidally. This trapezoidal distortion is corrected automatically.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Auto Keystone
Note
Trapezoidal distortion can be corrected with the Auto Keystone Correction function for angles up to about 12 degrees vertically with respect to the screen. When the screen is slanting or the image is
deteriorated, set “Auto Keystone” to “ ” (OFF). You can make corrections manually when you
want to make fine adjustments after the Auto Keystone Correction function has been acti- vated. (See page 31.)
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The projected image is corrected trapezoi- dal distortion automatically. The projected image is not corrected trapezoidal distortion automatically.
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
This function allows you to set the audio output of the internal speaker to “
” (ON) or “ ” (OFF) such as when the projector is connected to an external amplifier.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Speaker Settings
Selectable items
(ON)
(OFF)
Description The audio signal is output from the internal speaker. The audio signal is not output from the internal speaker.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Make sure that both the projector and computer are set for the same baud rate.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of RS-232C
Note
Refer to the “SETUP GUIDE” contained on the supplied CD-ROM for RS-232C Specifications and Command Settings. Refer to the computers operation manual for instructions for setting the computers baud rate.
Description
Transmission speed is slow.
Transmission speed is rapid.
Selectable items
9600 bps
115200 bps
When the Monitor Out has been set to “Enable”, the monitor output is activated and power is con- sumed even in the standby mode. It is recom- mended that the Monitor Out be set to “Disable” when it is not connected. This reduces power consumption when the projector is in the standby mode.
Menu operation Page 42
Example: “Options2” screen menu
Description of Monitor Out
Description The monitor output function is activated even if the projector is in standby mode. The monitor output function is switched off when the projector is in standby mode.
Selectable items
Enable
Disable
Helpful Functions Set during Installation (“Options2” menu)
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
The projector can switch the on-screen display language among 11 languages: English, German, Spanish, Dutch, French, Italian, Swedish, Portu- guese, Chinese, Korean or Japanese.
Example: “Language” screen menu for
INPUT 1 (RGB) mode
1
Press on the remote control.
The “Picture” menu will be displayed.
2 Press or to select the “Lan-
guage” menu icon (
).
The “Language” menu will be displayed.
3
Press or to select the desired
language, and then press
.
The language you selected will be set as the on-screen display.
4 Press .
The “Language” menu will disappear.
Note
This procedure can also be performed by using the buttons on the projector.
Using the “Language” Menu
ENTER button
MENU button
MOUSE/Adjustment button ( / / / )
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Maintenance Indicators
The warning lights on the projector indicate problems inside the projector. If a problem occurs, either the temperature indicator or the lamp indicator will illuminate red, and the projector will enter the standby mode. After the projector has entered the standby mode, follow the procedures given below.
About the temperature warning indicator
If the temperature inside the projector increases, due to blockage of the air vents, or the setting location,
” will illuminate in the lower left corner of the picture. If the temperature keeps on rising, the lamp will
turn off and the temperature warning indicator will blink, the cooling fan will run for a further 90 seconds, and
then the projector will enter the standby mode. After “
” appears, ensure to perform the measures
described on page 63.
About the lamp indicator
When the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, “ ” (yellow) and “Change The Lamp.” will be
displayed on the screen. When the percentage becomes 0%, it will change to “
” (red), the lamp will
automatically turn off and then the projector will automatically enter the standby mode. At this time, the lamp indicator will illuminate in red.
If you try to turn on the projector a fourth time without replacing the lamp, the projector will not turn on.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
It is recommended that the lamp unit (optional: AN-MB60LP) be replaced when the remaining lamp life becomes 5% or less, or when you notice a significant deterioration in the picture and color quality. The lamp life (percentage) can be checked with the on-screen display. See page 49. Purchase a replacement lamp unit of type AN-MB60LP from your place of purchase, nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
IMPORTANT NOTE TO U.S. CUSTOMERS:
The lamp included with this projector is backed by a 90-day parts and labor limited warranty. All service of this projector under warranty, including lamp replacement, must be obtained through a Sharp Autho- rized Projector Dealer or Service Center. For the name of the nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center, please call toll-free: 1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277).
Hg LAMP CONTAINS MERCURY For State Lamp Disposal Information www.lamprecycle.org or 1-800-BE-SHARP
This projector utilizes a pressurized mercury lamp. A loud sound may indicate lamp failure. Lamp failure can be attributed to numerous sources such as: excessive shock, improper cooling, surface scratches or deterioration of the lamp due to a lapse of usage time. The period of time up to failure largely varies depending on the individual lamp and/or the condition and the frequency of use. It is important to note that failure can often result in the bulb cracking. When the lamp replacement indicator and on-screen display icon are illuminated, it is recommended that the lamp be replaced with a new one immediately, even if the lamp appears to be operating normally. Should the lamp break, the glass particles may spread inside the lamp cage or gas contained in the lamp may be vented into the room from the exhaust vent. Because the gas in this lamp includes mercury, ventilate the room well if the lamp breaks and avoid all exposure to the released gas. In case of exposure to the gas, consult a doctor as soon as possible. Should the lamp break, there is also a possibility that glass particles may spread inside of the projector. In such a case, it is recommended you contact your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center to assure safe operation.
Caution
Do not remove the lamp unit from the projector right after use. The lamp will be very hot and may cause burn or injury. Wait at least one hour after the power cord is disconnected to allow the surface of the lamp unit to fully cool before removing the lamp unit.
Carefully change the lamp by following the instructions described in this section. *If you wish, you may have the lamp replaced at your nearest Sharp Authorized Projector Dealer or Service Center.
* If the new lamp does not illuminate after replacement, take your projector to the nearest Sharp Authorized
Projector Dealer or Service Center for repair.
Regarding the Lamp
U.S.A. ONLY
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
4Remove the lamp unit.
Loosen the securing screws from the lamp unit. Hold the lamp unit by the handle and pull it in the direction of the arrow. At this time, keep the lamp unit horizontal and do not tilt it.
5 Insert the new lamp unit.
Press the lamp unit firmly into the lamp unit compartment. Fasten the securing screws.
6 Replace the lamp unit cover.
Align the lamp unit cover and slide it to close. Then tighten the user service screw to secure the lamp unit cover.
Info
If the lamp unit and lamp unit cover are not correctly installed, the power will not turn on, even if the power cord is connected to the projector.
Reset the lamp timer after replacing the lamp.
Info
Make sure to reset the lamp timer only when replacing the lamp. If you reset the lamp timer and continue to use the same lamp, this may cause the lamp to become damaged or explode.
1 Connect the power cord.
Plug the power cord into the AC socket of the projector.
2 Reset the lamp timer.
While simultaneously
holding down ,
and on the projector, press on
the projector.
“LAMP 0000H” is displayed, indicating that the lamp timer is reset.
Securing screws
Handle
AC socket
ON button
button
ENTER button
MENU button
Regarding the Lamp
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
For SHARP Assistance
If you encounter any problems during setup or operation of this projector, first refer to the
ÒTroubleshootingÓ section on pages 68 and 69. If this operation manual does not answer
your question, please contact the SHARP Service departments listed below.
U.S.A. Sharp Electronics Corporation
1-888-GO-SHARP (1-888-467-4277) lcdsupport@sharpsec.com http://www.sharplcd.com
Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
(905) 568-7140 http://www.sharp.ca
Mexico Sharp Electronics Corporation Mexico
Branch
(525) 716-9000 http://www.sharp.com.mx
Latin America Sharp Electronics Corp. Latin American
Group
(305) 264-2277 www.servicio@sharpsec.com http://www.siempresharp.com
Germany Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
01805-234675 http://www.sharp.de
U.K. Sharp Electronics (U.K.) Ltd.
0161-205-2333 cic@sharp-uk.co.uk http://www.sharp.co.uk
Italy Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
(39) 02-89595-1 http://www.sharp.it
France Sharp Electronics France
01 49 90 35 40 hotlineced@sef.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.fr
Spain Sharp Electronica Espana, S.A.
93 5819700 sharplcd@sees.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.es
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
0041 1 846 63 11 cattaneo@sez.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.ch
Sweden Sharp Electronics ( Nordic ) AB
(46) 8 6343600 vision.support@sen.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.se
Austria Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Branch Office Austria
0043 1 727 19 123 pogats@sea.sharp-eu.com http://www.sharp.at
Benelux SHARP Electronics Benelux BV
0900-SHARPCE (0900-7427723) Nederland 9900-0159 Belgium http://www.sharp.nl http://www.sharp.be http://www.sharp.lu
Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia
Pty. Ltd.
1300-135-022 http://www.sharp.net.au
New Zealand Sharp Corporation of New Zealand
(09) 634-2059, (09) 636-6972 http://www.sharpnz.co.nz
Singapore Sharp-Roxy Sales (S) Pte. Ltd.
65-226-6556 ckng@srs.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.sg
Hong Kong Sharp-Roxy (HK) Ltd.
(852) 2410-2623 dcmktg@srh.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp.com.hk
Taiwan Sharp Corporation (Taiwan)
0800-025111 http://www.sharp-scot.com.tw
Malaysia Sharp-Roxy Sales & Service Co.
(60) 3-5125678
U.A.E. Sharp Middle East Fze
971-4-81-5311 helpdesk@smef.global.sharp.co.jp
Thailand Sharp Thebnakorn Co. Ltd.
02-236-0170 svc@stcl.global.sharp.co.jp http://www.sharp-th.com
Korea Sharp Electronics Incorporated of
Korea
(82) 2-3660-2002 lcd@sharp-korea.co.kr http://www.sharpkorea.co.kr
India Sharp Business Systems (India)
Limited
(91) 11- 6431313 service@sharp-oa.com
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Glossary
Aspect Ratio
Width and height ratio of an image. The normal aspect ratio of a computer and video image is 4:3. There are also wide images with an aspect ratio of 16:9 and 21:9.
Auto Sync
Optimizes projected computer images by auto- matically adjusting certain characteristics.
Background
Initial setting image projected when no signal is being output.
Border
Projects a 4:3 image fully within a 16:9 screen by keeping the aspect ratio at 4:3.
Clock
Clock adjustment is used to adjust vertical noise when clock level is incorrect.
CLR Temp (Color temperature)
Function that can be used to adjust the color tem- perature to suit the type of image input to the pro- jector. Decrease the color temperature to create warmer, reddish images for natural flesh tones, or increase to create cooler, bluish images for a brighter picture.
Dot by dot
Mode that projects images in their native resolution.
Intelligent compression
High quality resizing of lower and higher resolu- tion images to fit the projectors native resolution.
Keylock
Mode that can lock the operation of projector but- tons to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
Keystone Correction
Function to digitally correct a distorted image when the projector is set up at an angle, smooth- ens out jaggies on keystone images and com- presses the image not only horizontally but verti- cally keeping the 4:3 aspect ratio.
Password
A password is set so that changes cannot be made in the “Options2” setting.
Phase
Phase shift is a timing shift between isomorphic signals with the same resolution. When phase level is incorrect, the projected image typically displays horizontal flicker.
Picture Mode
Image quality enhancement function that offers a richer image by brightening the darker portions of the image without altering the brightness of the brighter portions. You can select four different modes: STANDARD, PRESENTATION, CINEMA and GAME.
Resize
Allows you to modify or customize the picture dis- play mode to enhance the input image. You can select four different modes: NORMAL, DOT BY DOT, BORDER and STRETCH.
sRGB
An international standard of color reproduction regulated by the IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). As the fixed color area has been decided by the IEC, the color changes according to DLP features, so that the images are displayed in a natural tint based on an original image, when “sRGB” is set to “ON”.
Stretch
Mode that stretches the 4:3 image horizontally to display it fully on a 16:9 screen.
System Lock
If the “Keycode” set in the projector is not cor- rectly entered, the projector will not operate even if signals are entered.
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 77
-73
Appendix
AC socket ............................................................. 29
Adjustment buttons .............................................. 40
Aspect ratio ..................................................... 36,37
AUDIO INPUT terminal........................................ 23
AUDIO OUTPUT terminal.................................... 28
Auto Keystone ...................................................... 56
Auto Power Off ..................................................... 52
Auto Sync (Auto Sync adjustment) ...................... 48
AUTO SYNC button ............................................. 48
AV MUTE button .................................................. 34
Background .......................................................... 51
Blue ...................................................................... 44
Border ............................................................. 36,49
Bright .................................................................... 44
Bright Boost ......................................................... 45
Cinema................................................................. 44
Clock .................................................................... 47
CLR Temp (Color Temperature) ........................... 45
Color .................................................................... 44
Contrast ............................................................... 44
DIN-D-sub RS-232C adaptor .............................. 27
Dot By Dot ...................................................... 36,49
Eco Mode ............................................................. 51
ENLARGE buttons ............................................... 34
ENTER button ...................................................... 40
Exhaust vent ................................................7,13,61
Fine Sync ........................................................ 38,47
FOCUS buttons ................................................... 32
FREEZE button .................................................... 35
Front adjustment foot ........................................... 30
Game ................................................................... 44
HEIGHT ADJUST button ..................................... 30
H-Pos ................................................................... 47
INPUT 1 terminal ............................................ 23,25
INPUT 1 – 4 modes ............................................. 33
INPUT 2 terminal ............................................ 23,25
INPUT 3 terminal ................................................. 26
INPUT 4 terminal ................................................. 26
INPUT buttons ..................................................... 33
Intake vent ........................................................ 7,61
Kensington Security Standard connector ............ 13
Keycode ...............................................................53
Keylock ................................................................. 54
KEYSTONE button .............................................. 31
Keystone Correction ............................................ 31
Lamp .................................................................... 64
Lamp indicator ..................................................... 62
Lamp Timer (Life) ................................................. 49
Language (on-screen display language) ........ 39,60
L-CLICK/ENTER button .................................. 24,40
Lens cap .............................................................. 11
Index
MENU button ....................................................... 40
Menu Position ...................................................... 52
MOUSE/Adjustment button ............................ 24,40
Normal ............................................................ 36,49
ON button ............................................................. 29
Optional accessories ........................................... 10
Options1 .......................................................... 39,49
Options2 .......................................................... 39,55
OSD Display ........................................................ 50
OUTPUT (INPUT 1, 2) terminal .......................... 28
Password ............................................................. 55
PDF ........................................................................ 9
Phase ................................................................... 47
Picture .............................................................38,44
Picture Mode ........................................................ 44
PICTURE MODE button ...................................... 35
Power cord ........................................................... 29
Power indicator .................................................... 12
Presentation ......................................................... 44
PRJ mode ............................................................ 57
R-CLICK/UNDO button ................................... 24,40
Rear adjustment feet ........................................... 30
Red ...................................................................... 44
Remote control .................................................... 14
Remote control sensor ........................................ 15
Replacing the lamp .............................................. 64
RESIZE button ..................................................... 36
RGB cable............................................................ 23
RS-232C terminal ................................................ 27
Sharp ................................................................... 44
Signal Info ............................................................ 48
Signal Type .......................................................... 46
Special Modes ..................................................... 47
sRGB ................................................................... 46
Standard .............................................................. 44
STANDBY button ................................................. 29
Storage case ........................................................ 18
Stretch............................................................. 36,49
Supplied accessories ........................................... 10
System Lock ........................................................ 53
Temperature warning indicator ............................ 62
Tint ....................................................................... 44
USB terminal ........................................................ 23
Video System ....................................................... 50
Volume buttons .................................................... 33
V-Pos .................................................................... 47
Zoom buttons ....................................................... 32
ZOOM/FOCUS button ......................................... 32
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Page 78
SHARP CORPORATION
Downloaded From projector-manual.com Sharp Manuals
Loading...